2015 Lexus Nx 300h owners manual - OwnersMan

File Info : application/pdf, 681 Pages, 9.14MB

2015-Lexus-Nx-300h

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety and security

Make sure to read through them

2 Instrument cluster

Operation of each component

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.
Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.

4 Driving

Lexus Display Audio system

Operations and advices which are necessary for driving
Operating the Lexus Display Audio system

6 Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

Maintenance and care

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

10 For owners

Index

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners Search by symptom Search alphabetically

NX300h_U_OM78007U

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information................................... 8 Reading this manual...................................14 How to search ..............................................15 Pictorial index...............................................16
1 For safety and security
1-1. For safe use Before driving................................. 28 For safety drive...............................30 Seat belts.......................................... 32 SRS airbags..................................... 40 Front passenger occupant classification system.................. 53 Safety information for children .......................................... 59 Child restraint systems ...............60 Exhaust gas precautions............. 76
1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system features................77 Hybrid system precautions.........81
1-3. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ......................86 Alarm .................................................88 Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)....................................90

2 Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators....................................... 92
Gauges and meters......................97
Multi-information display ........ 102
Head-up display.......................... 106
Energy monitor/ consumption screen...................111

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Steering wheel ............................. 160

Headlight switch ..........................219

Inside rear view mirror................ 161

Automatic High Beam............. 223

Outside rear view mirrors........163
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Fog light switch ............................227 1 Windshield wipers and
washer ......................................... 228

Power windows.............................166

Rear window wiper and

Moon roof.......................................169

washer ......................................... 234

4-4. Refueling

4 Driving

Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 236 3

4-5. Using the driving support

4-1. Before driving

systems

Driving the vehicle .......................174

Dynamic radar cruise

Cargo and luggage.................... 182

control ......................................... 240

Vehicle load limits....................... 186 Trailer towing (vehicles with
towing package) .......................187 Trailer towing (vehicles
without towing package)...... 199 Dinghy towing .............................200
4-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch ............. 201 EV drive mode............................206 Hybrid transmission..................208

Dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed

range............................................ 253

Cruise control ..............................267 6

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) .............270
Intuitive parking assist...............279 7

Lexus parking assist monitor.........................................287 8
Driving mode select switch ........................................... 303

Turn signal lever............................212

Driving assist systems ..............305 9

Parking brake ................................213

PCS (Pre-Collision

Brake Hold .....................................216 ASC (Active Sound

System) ........................................ 310 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......316 10

Control) ....................................... 218 4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips................................................. 324

Winter driving tips..................... 326

Utility vehicle precautions......330

NX300h_U_OM78007U

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5 Lexus Display Audio system
5-1. Basic Operations Lexus Display Audio System ........................................ 336 Steering wheel audio switches...................................... 342 Mobile Assistant........................343 USB/AUX ports ........................ 345
5-2. Setup Setup menu ................................. 347 General settings........................348 Voice settings................................351 Display settings.......................... 352
5-3. Using the audio system Selecting the audio source ......................................... 353 Optimal use of the audio system ......................................... 354 Audio settings............................. 355 Audio menu screen operation ...................................358
5-4. Using the radio Radio operation...........................361
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation ................367

5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod................... 374
Using USB memory device...........................................377
Using the AUX port ................. 381
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® Steps for using Bluetooth® devices........................................ 382 Registering a Bluetooth® device.......................................... 384 Selecting a Bluetooth® device..........................................385 Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player..............................386 Connecting a Bluetooth® phone .......................................... 387 Displaying a Bluetooth® device details ...........................388 Detailed Bluetooth® settings .......................................389
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio Listening to Bluetooth® Audio ..........................................390

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone Using a Bluetooth®

6 Interior features

Phone.......................................... 392

Making a call............................... 394 6-1. Using the air conditioning

Receiving a call ...........................397
Speaking on the phone...........398 Using a Bluetooth®
phone message.......................400

system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning

system .......................................... 430

Heated steering wheel/ seat heaters/

Using the steering wheel switches...................................... 402
Bluetooth® phone settings .......................................403

seat ventilators.........................440 6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ......................... 443

5-10. Phonebook Contact settings ........................405 Messaging setting.....................408

· Front interior light................ 444 · Personal lights ....................... 444 4 · Rear interior light................. 445

5-11. Bluetooth®

6-3. Using the storage features

What to do if...

List of storage features ............ 446

(Troubleshooting)...................409

· Glove box ................................447

Bluetooth® ....................................413

· Console box ...........................447 6

5-12. Other function "Information" screen................. 418 USB photo ................................... 420 Weather information ............... 422 Voice command system ......... 423

· Cup holders/ bottle holders ........................448 7
· Sunglass holder .................... 449
Luggage compartment features .......................................450 8

LEXUS Enform Remote .........427

NX300h_U_OM78007U

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6-4. Other interior features Other interior features ............ 455 · Sun visors ................................ 455 · Vanity mirrors........................ 455 · Clock ........................................ 456 · Power outlet (12 VDC)...... 456 · Power outlet (120 VAC)....457 · Wireless charger..................458 · Armrest.................................... 465 · Assist grips ............................. 465 · Coat hooks............................. 466 Garage door opener ................467 Compass ........................................473 Safety Connect............................477
7 Maintenance and care
7-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ................484 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior..................488
7-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements ..............................491 General maintenance.............. 494 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.....................................497

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions................................ 498 Hood ...............................................500 Positioning a floor jack.............. 501 Engine compartment ...............502 12-volt battery ...............................512 Tires....................................................516 Tire inflation pressure ............... 525 Wheels........................................... 528 Air conditioning filter ...............530 Electronic key battery.............. 532 Checking and replacing fuses.............................................. 534 Light bulbs ....................................538
8 When trouble arises
8-1. Essential information Emergency flashers .................. 556 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .................................557

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to

9 Vehicle specifications

be towed.....................................558

If you think something is

9-1. Specifications

wrong........................................... 564 If a warning light turns on

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ..................608

or a warning buzzer

Fuel information ...........................618

sounds .........................................565

Tire information.............................621 2

If a warning message is displayed .....................................572
If you have a flat tire ...................575
If the hybrid system will not

9-2. Customization Customizable features ............ 633
9-3. Initialization

start ............................................... 589

Items to initialize......................... 643

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ............................ 591

10 For owners

If the electronic key does not

operate properly..................... 592 Reporting safety defects for

If the 12-volt battery is

U.S. owners............................................ 646

discharged................................. 595 If your vehicle overheats .........600

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) .........647

If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................................604

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ........ 649

Index

8 What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ...............................658
Alphabetical index ................................ 662 9

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL" for information regarding the equipment listed below.

· Navigation system · Lexus parking assist monitor

· Audio/visual system · Lexus Enform with Safety Con-
nect

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8
For your information
Main Owner's Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

9 Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Dynamic radar cruise control system Cruise control system Anti-lock brake system SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

10 Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:
· Engine speed · Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) · Accelerator status · Brake status · Vehicle speed · Shift position · Hybrid battery (traction battery) status The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures. Data usage Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality. Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except: · With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle
is leased · In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency · For use by Lexus in a lawsuit · For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

11 Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating; · Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; · How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Disclosure of the EDR data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: · An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained · In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency · For use by Lexus in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Lexus may: · Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance · Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing informa-
tion about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
NX300h_U_OM78007U

12 Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
WARNING General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. General precaution regarding children's safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

13
NX300h_U_OM78007U

14
Reading this manual
WARNING: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people. NOTICE: Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order. Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or position being explained. Means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

15
How to search
Searching by name · Alphabetical index................ P. 662
Searching by installation position · Pictorial index ..............................P. 16
Searching by symptom or sound · What to do if... (Troubleshooting)..................P. 658
Searching by title · Table of contents.......................... P. 2
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

Exterior

The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (P. 538)

1 Side doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 124 Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 124 Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 166 Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 592 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

2 Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 129
Opening from inside the cabin* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

3 Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 163

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 163

Folding Driving

pthoesimtioirnromrse.m. .o. r. y. .*.

. .

P. P.

163 154

Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 435

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

4 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 228 Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 326 To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 436 Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 486
5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236 Refueling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 236 Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 610
6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 516 Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 615 Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 327 Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 516 Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 575
7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 500 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 500 Engine compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 503 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 611 Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 600 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving (Replacing method: P. 538, Watts: P. 617)
8 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
9 Parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
10 Fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
11 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 212
12 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
13 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
14 Back-up light Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
15 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

NX300h_U_OM78007U

*: If equipped

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

1 Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201 Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201 Emergency stop of the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 557 When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 589 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572
2 Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 208 Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208 Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 558 When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 591
3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 97 Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 97 Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 92 When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 565
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102 Energy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 111 When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

5 Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 212 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219 Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/ daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227

6 Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 228, 234 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 228, 234 Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 511 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

7 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 556

8 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 500

9 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 160

Adjustment . . . . Driving position

.m. .e.m. .o. r. y. .*.1.

. .

P. P.

160 154

10 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 430 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 430 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 435
11 Audio system*2
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 336 Hands-free system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 392

NX300h_U_OM78007U

*1: If equipped *2: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to
"NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Pictorial index

Switches

1 Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 99
2 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 99
3 Seat heater switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 441 4 Seat ventilator switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442 5 Automatic High Beam switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 223 6 Intuitive parking assist switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 279 7 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 316 8 Power back door switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130 9 PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 311 10 Heated steering wheel switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 441 11 Rear seat operations switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 148

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

1 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 166
2 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 166
3 Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 163
4 Door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 126
5 Driving position memory switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 155 6 HUD (Head-up display) switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 106 7 ASC (Active Sound Control) dial*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218

NX300h_U_OM78007U

*: If equipped

Pictorial index

1 Audio remote control switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 342
2 Meter control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103
3 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 244, 257
4 Cruise control switch
Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 267 Dynamic radar cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 240, 253 5 LDA switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270 LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270 6 Talk switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 402 7 Telephone switches*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 402

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

1 EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 206
2 Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 303
3 VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307
4 Parking brake switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213, 214 Applying/releasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213, 214 Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 327 Warning buzzer/message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 566, 572
5 Brake hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 216
6 Lexus Display Audio controller*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 338 7 Remote Touch*1, 2

NX300h_U_OM78007U

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to
"NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
*2: If equipped

Pictorial index

Interior

1 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 40 2 Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28 3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 146 4 Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147 5 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158 6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32 7 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 447 8 Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 126 9 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448 10 Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 465
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

1 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
2 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 455
3 Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 455
4 Interior light*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444, 445
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 444
5 Moon roof switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 169 6 "SOS" button*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477 7 Garage door opener switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 467

*1: If equipped *2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Pictorial index

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use Before driving................................. 28 For safety drive...............................30 Seat belts .......................................... 32 SRS airbags .....................................40 Front passenger occupant classification system..................53 Safety information for children ..........................................59 Child restraint systems ...............60 Exhaust gas precautions .............76
1-2. Hybrid system Hybrid system features................77 Hybrid system precautions........ 81
1-3. Theft deterrent system Immobilizer system ......................86 Alarm .................................................88 Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)....................................90

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Before driving

Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retain-

ing hook (clip) to secure the floor

mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. When installing the driver's floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, 1 even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat. Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

For safety drive

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture
1 Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (P. 146)
2 Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (P. 146, 160)
3 Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 158)
4 Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 32)
Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (P. 32) Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 60)
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see the rear of the vehicle clearly, by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 161, 163)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effec-

tiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

For safety and security

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the rear center seat)
1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press the release button.
Release button

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Fastening the seat belt (for the rear center seat)
1 Take out the plate.

Plate B

Plate A

2 When fixing the belt, in the order of plate A and then plate B, insert the plate into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.
1 Plate A, buckle A
2 Plate B, buckle B

Plate B

Buckle B

Plate A Buckle A

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Releasing and stowing the seat belt (for the rear center seat)
1 To release the hooked buckle B, push the buckle release button.

2 Insert the mechanical key (P. 118) or plate B into the notch of buckle A and remove the belt.
Retract the belt slowly when releasing and stowing the seat belt.

Release button Plate B Buckle A

3 Stow in the cover in the order of plate B and then plate A.
In order to securely fix it, firmly insert it to the back.

Plate B Plate A

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

4 Stow seat belt buckle A and buckle B in the pockets.

1-1. For safe use

Buckle B

Buckle A

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Release button

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.
Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.
Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 60) When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 32)
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Wearing a seat belt

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. Always wear a seat belt properly.

Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32)
When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
Seat belt pretensioners Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision. If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
Adjustable shoulder anchor Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 35)
Seat belt damage and wear Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage. Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
When using the rear center seat belt
Do not use the rear center seat belt with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
Using a seat belt extender Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another 1 person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE
When releasing a seat belt extender Press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt, then, release the extender from the seat belt buckle. (P. 44) This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

For safety and security

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS front airbags
1 SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
2 SRS knee airbag Can help provide driver protection
3 SRS seat cushion airbag Can help restrain the front passenger.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

SRS side and curtain shield airbags
4 SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
5 SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats Can prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event 1
of vehicle rollover

For safety and security

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

1 Front passenger airbag

9 Side impact sensors (front)

2 "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG 10 Seat belt pretensioners and force

OFF" indicator lights

limiters

3 Side airbags

11 Passenger seat cushion airbag

4 Curtain shield airbags

12 Driver's seat position sensor

5 Side impact sensors (rear)

13 Driver knee airbag

6 SRS warning light

14 Driver's seat belt buckle switch

7 Front passenger occupant classifica- 15 Front passenger's seat belt buckle

tion system (ECU and sensors)

switch

8 Driver airbag

16 Front impact sensors

17 Airbag sensor assembly

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or seri- 1 ous injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: · Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. · Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. · If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
SRS airbag precautions If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 60)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

WARNING SRS airbag precautions
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

1-1. For safe use

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
SRS airbag precautions Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions

If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your

Lexus dealer.

Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier

Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. The windshield may crack. For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle's location (without needing to push the "SOS" button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 477)
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags) The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12-18 mph [20-30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform). However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations: · If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact · If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle "underrides", or goes under, the bed of a truck Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate. The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 53) The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front passenger seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 -18 mph [20 -30 km/h]). The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover. The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.
The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal. The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags) The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
Collision from the side Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or lowspeed frontal collision.
Collision from the rear Pitching end over end

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident that

was not severe enough to cause the SRS front

airbags to inflate.

A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The front passenger's seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1

1 SRS warning light 2 Seat belt reminder light 3 "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light 4 "AIR BAG ON" indicator light

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Adult*1

Indicator/ warning light
Devices
Child*4

"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights

"AIR BAG ON"

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Activated *2 or deactivated*3

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter

Activated

Indicator/ warning light
Devices

"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights

"AIR BAG OFF" or "AIR
BAG ON"*4

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Off*2 or flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated or
activated*4

Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Activated

Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Deactivated or
activated*2, 4

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter

Activated

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint system with infant*5

Indicator/ warning light

"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light

"AIR BAG
OFF"*6

Off

Off*2 or

flashing*3

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Devices

Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Activated Deactivated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter

Activated

Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light
Devices

"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light Seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force
limiter

"AIR BAG OFF" Off
Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light

"AIR BAG OFF" On

Seat belt reminder light

Off

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Devices

Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side

Activated Deactivated

Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter

Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt. *3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the
system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the
physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for-
ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat
when it is unavoidable. (P. 63)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the
child restraint system properly. (P. 60)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Wear the seat belt properly. Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the

buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).

Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 63) Do not modify or remove the front seats. Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks. Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

Safety information for children

1-1. For safe use

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
1
It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.
Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (P. 126, 166)
Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats etc.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof (if equipped) or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that can not properly use a seat belt. For the child's safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the instruction manual enclosed with the restraint system.
Table of contents
Points to remember ...............................................................................................................P. 60 Child restraint system ........................................................................................................... P. 62 When using a child restraint system on a passenger seat .....................................P. 63 When using a child restraint system on a rear seat ..................................................P. 65 Child restraint system installation method
· Fixed with a seat belt..................................................................................................P. 66 · Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor........................................................P. 71 · Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)............................................... P. 73
Points to remember
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regulations for
child restraint systems. Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to
the age and size of the child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be

properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age

and size of the child.

Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Holding a child in your or someone else's arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

Place one child to a child restraint system and then secure the child with the harness of the child restraint system.

Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.

Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint system
Types of child restraint system installation methods Confirm with the instruction manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the usage of the child restraint system.

Installation method

Page

Seat belt attachment

P. 66

Child restraint

LATCH anchors

P. 71

attachment

Anchor brack-

ets (for top tether strap)

P. 73

attachment

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

When using a child restraint system on a passenger seat

When installing a child restraint system to a passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child restraint systems to a rear seats. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the passenger seat as follows and install the child restraint system.

Raise the seatback as much as

possible

Move the seat to the rearmost

position

Raise the seat to the upper most

position

If the head restraint interferes

with the child restraint system

installation and the head restraint

can be removed, remove the

head restraint

For safety and security

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
When installing a child restraint system Observe the following when installing child restraint system to the front passenger seat if it is unavoidable. The front passenger SRS air bag inflates with considerable speed and force that if not observed may lead to death or serious injury to the child. Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and raise the seat to the upper most position, even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

When using a child restraint system on a rear seat

WARNING
When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the 1 rear seat. If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS curtain shield airbag deploys even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS curtain shield airbag inflates, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock func-
tion belt)
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. Rear-facing -- Infant seat/convertible seat 1 Adjust the seatback
If there is gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback until good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted

to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it

cannot be extended.

6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure

that it is installed securely.

Forward-facing -- Convertible seat 1 Adjust the seatback

If there is gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback until good contact is achieved.

2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (P. 158)

3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

4 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

6 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
7 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely.
Booster seat
1 High back type: If the head restraint interferes with your child restraint system, and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (P. 158)

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Booster type

High back type

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
3 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 32)
Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system. Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

69
1

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

WARNING
When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 36)
Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor
Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

71
1

Installation with LATCH system Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. 1 Adjust the seatback If there is gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback until good contact is achieved. 2 If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (P. 158)
3 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Type A
4 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Type B
4 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

Canada only
5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

WARNING

When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fixing the top strap.

Anchor brackets

Rear center seat Outboard rear seats

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
Outboard rear seats
1 Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (P. 158)

2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. When installing the child restraint system with the head rest being raised, be sure to have the top tether strap pass underneath the head rest.
Rear center seat
1 Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. (P. 158)

Top tether strap

Hook

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

Hook

1-1. For safe use

Top tether strap

WARNING
When installing a child restraint system Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted. Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket. Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Outboard rear seats: When installing the child restraint system with the head rest being raised, after the head rest has been raised and then the anchor bracket has been fixed, do not lower the head rest. Rear center seat: When installing the child restraint system with the head rest being lowered, be sure to have the top tether strap pass over the top of the head rest. If the belt passes below the head rest, it is possible that the child restraint system may not be securely fixed.

NOTICE
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body are contained in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING
Exhaust gases contain harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard. Important points while driving
Keep the back door closed. If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the
windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. When parking
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the hybrid system.
Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
Exhaust pipe The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Hybrid system features

1-2. Hybrid system

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate it with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric 1 motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

For safety and security

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item. 1 Gasoline engine 2 Front electric motor (traction motor)
3 Rear electric motor (traction motor)* *: AWD models only
NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-2. Hybrid system

When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped* and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.
When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) is not being charged. When the vehicle is stopped, always put the shift lever to P. Also, even in heavy traffic conditions, drive the vehicle in D or S.
*: When the hybrid battery (traction battery) requires charging or the engine is warm-
ing up, etc., the gasoline engine will not automatically stop. (P. 79)
During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.
When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).
When braking (regenerative braking)
The wheels operate the electric motor (traction motor) as a power generator, and the hybrid battery (traction battery) is charged.

Vehicle proximity notification system
When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle's approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-2. Hybrid system

Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift lever in D or S.

EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions: During gasoline engine warm-up During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low When the heater is switched on
Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction battery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you are unable to start the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
Charging the 12-volt battery P. 597
After the 12-volt battery has discharged or when the terminal has been removed and installed during exchange, etc. The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-2. Hybrid system

Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle There may be no engine sound or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. For safety, make sure to shift the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake when parked. The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction: Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment. Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops. Relay operating sounds such as a snap or soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid battery (traction battery), behind the rear seats, when the hybrid system is started or stopped. Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open. Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling. Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply. Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed or as the accelerator pedal is released. Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops. Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents under the rear seats.
Vehicle proximity notification system In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for surrounding people to hear. In very noisy areas In the wind or the rain Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the front.
Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
Customization Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 633)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Hybrid system precautions

1-2. Hybrid system

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system

(about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely

hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to

the vehicle.

For safety and security

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

1 Warning label

5 High voltage cables (orange)

2 Hybrid battery (traction battery) 6 Front electric motor (traction

3 Rear electric motor (traction motor)

motor)*

7 Power control unit

4 Service plug

8 Air conditioning compressor

*: AWD models only

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake and discharge vents

The cooling air intake and discharge vents for the hybrid battery (traction battery) are located under the rear seats and between the rear seats and deck board, respectively. If the air intake vents are blocked, it could lead to a reduction in hybrid battery (traction battery) output.

Air intake vents

The hybrid battery (traction battery) output will not be reduced, even if the space between the upper part of the air discharge vents on the back of the rear seat and deck board is blocked with luggage, etc.

Air discharge vents
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-2. Hybrid system

If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this case, try to start the system again. If the "READY" indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the

vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 567) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start.

(The standard amount of fuel is about 2.7 gal. [10.1 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on

a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope. Add extra fuel when

the vehicle is inclined.)

Electromagnetic waves

High voltage parts and cables on hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

WARNING

High voltage precautions This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors. The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the warning labels attached to the vehicle.
Never try to open the service plug access hole located underneath the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-2. Hybrid system

WARNING
Road accident cautions Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury: Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and turn the hybrid system off. Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors. If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires. If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention. If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous. If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with front wheels (2WD models) or four wheels (AWD models) raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. (P. 558) Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-2. Hybrid system

WARNING

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Lexus dealer. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death

or serious injury:

· The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
· The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air intake and discharge vents Do not place objects that will block the air intake vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may have a reduction in hybrid battery (traction battery) output as well as be damaged. Clean the air intake and discharge vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating. Do not get water or foreign materials in either the air intake and discharge vents as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery). Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
The indicator light flashes after the power switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key registered to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
Certification for the immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-3. Theft deterrent system

WARNING
Certifications for the immobilizer system Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

For safety and security

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Alarm

The alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected. The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set: A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry
function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.) The hood is opened.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms: Unlock the doors. Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid sys-
tem. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

For safety and security

1-3. Theft deterrent system

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

Nobody is in the vehicle.

The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.

No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations: (Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

A person inside the vehicle opens a door or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside lock button.

The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (P. 597)

Alarm-operated door lock The door automatically locks when the following occurs: When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated. While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

91
2 Instrument cluster
2. Instrument cluster Warning lights and indicators....................................... 92 Gauges and meters ......................97 Multi-information display ........ 102 Head-up display .......................... 106 Energy monitor/ consumption screen .................. 111
NX300h_U_OM78007U

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the meter and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems.

*1 Brake system warning light (P. 565)

*1 ABS warning light (P. 566)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

*1
(Canada)

Brake system warning light (P. 565)

*1 Electric power steering

system warning light

(P. 566)

*2 Charging system warning light (P. 565)

*1 Electric power steering system warning light (P. 566)

*2 Low engine oil pressure warning light (P. 565)

*1, 3 PCS warning light (P. 566)

(if equipped)

*2 High coolant temperature warning light (P. 565)

*1 Slip indicator light (P. 566)

*1 Brake system warning light (P. 565)

*1, 3 Brake hold operated indicator (P. 566)

*1
(U.S.A.)
*1
(Canada)
*1

Malfunction indicator lamp (P. 565) Malfunction indicator lamp (P. 565) SRS warning light (P. 566)

*3
(U.S.A.)
*3
(Canada)

Parking brake indicator (P. 566) Parking brake indicator (P. 566)

Low fuel level warning light (P. 567)

*1
(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light (P. 566)

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (P. 567)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

2. Instrument cluster

*1 Master warning light (P. 567)
*1 Tire pressure warning light (P. 567)

*2 Brake Override System/ Drive-Start Control warning light (P. 567)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a
system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. *3: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction. *4: This light illuminates on the center panel.
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator (P. 212)

"READY" indicator (P. 201)

(U.S.A.) (Canada)

Headlight indicator (P. 219) Tail light indicator (P. 220) Headlight high beam indicator (P. 220)

Automatic High Beam indicator (P. 223) (if equipped) Fog light indicator (P. 227)

EV indicator (P. 79)

*8 EV drive mode indicator (P. 206)

*8 "ECO" indicator (P. 303)

*8 "SPORT" indicator (P. 303)

*8
(if equipped)

Radar cruise control indicator (P. 240, 253)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

*8 Cruise control "SET" indicator (P. 240, 253, 267)
*8 Cruise control indicator (P. 240, 253, 267)

(U.S.A.) (Canada)

Parking brake indicator (P. 213, 214) Parking brake indicator (P. 213, 214)

*8 LDA indicator (P. 270)

(if equipped)
*8
(if equipped)

Steering control indicator (P. 270)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 279) (if equipped)

Brake hold standby

indicator (P. 216)

*1 Brake hold operated indicator (P. 216)

*4, 8 Low outside temperature indicator (P. 97)

*1, 2 Slip indicator light (P. 306)
*1 VSC OFF indicator (P. 307)

*5, 6
(if equipped)
*7

BSM outside rear view mirror indicators (P. 316) Security indicator (P. 86, 88)

*1, 3 PCS warning light (P. 311)

*7 "AIR BAG ON/OFF" indicator (P. 53)

(if equipped)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to the ON mode to indicate that
a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or
after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on,
or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating. *3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. *4: When the outside temperature is approximately 37F (3C) or lower, the indicator
will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

2. Instrument cluster

*5: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate
in the following situations:
· When the power switch is turned to ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
· When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the power switch is in ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction in the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*6: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors. *7: This light illuminates on the center panel. *8: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Gauges and meters

2. Instrument cluster

When driving mode is in other than sport mode (P. 303)

When driving mode is in sport mode (P. 303)

Instrument cluster

The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region. 1 Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
2 Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P. 100)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

2. Instrument cluster

3 Background color of drive mode
Background color changes according to the drive mode. (P. 303) · Sport mode: Red · Eco drive mode: Blue When in Normal mode, the background color is Black.
4 Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37F (3C) or lower. Displays the vehicle speed
5 Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 208)
6 Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
7 Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
8 Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P. 102) Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P. 572)
9 Odometer, trip meter and maintenance required information display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters "A" and "B" can be used to record and display different distances independently. Maintenance required information: Displays the remaining distance until the engine oil should be changed. · Displays the maintenance required information when the power switch is ON
mode. · It can be reset from the "settings display" of the multi-information display.
(P. 102)
10 Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

Changing the display
Switches between odometer, trip meter and maintenance required information displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.

2. Instrument cluster

2
Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1 Darker 2 Brighter

The meters and display illuminate when The power switch is in ON mode.
Instrument panel brightness adjustment The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

100

2. Instrument cluster

Hybrid System Indicator
1 Power area Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)
2 Eco area Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
3 Hybrid Eco area Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.
4 Charge area Shows that energy is being recovered via the regenerative brake.

Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is in other than the sport mode.
By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.
Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the hybrid battery (traction battery).
*: When used in this manual, "regeneration" refers to the conversion of energy created
by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
Tachometer Hybrid System Indicator switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport mode. The settings of the tachometer display can be changed on the multi-information display. (P. 638)
Engine speed On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions, etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

101

Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

· When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h]) · When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.) When "--" or "E" is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Pop-up display

In some situations, a pop-up display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display or the odometer/trip meter/maintenance required information screen.

The pop-up display function can be set on/off. (P. 638)

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Customization

The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. (Customizable features: P. 633)

WARNING

The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in personal death or injury.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components When the tachometer is displayed, do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H); or "Engine Coolant Temp High" or "Hybrid System Overheated" is shown on the multi-information display. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine or hybrid system after it has cooled completely. (P. 600)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

102

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data. Menu icons
Displays the following information when an icon is selected. (P. 103) Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (P. 103)
Navigation system-linked display
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information. · Route guidance · Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display using the meter control switches.
Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)/Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (if equipped)/Cruise control (if equipped)
Select to display the dynamic radar cruise control/dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range/cruise control information, when the system is used. (P. 240, 253, 267) The displayed icon changes depending on the system used.
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) [Vehicles without dynamic radar cruise control, dynamic radar cruise control with fullspeed range, nor cruise control; Vehicles with LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)]
If activated, the operational status of LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) will also be displayed. (P. 270)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

103

Warning message display

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected. (P. 572)
Settings display

Select to change the meter display settings. (P. 638)
Energy monitor

Displays the status of the hybrid system. (P. 111)

Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

Automatically displayed when the system is used. (P. 279)

Operating the meter control switches
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches. 1 Select an item/change pages 2 Enter/Set 3 Return to the previous screen 4 Press:
Displays the screen registered to
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to (P. 638)
The registration confirmation screen is displayed. If the selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.
Drive information

Items displayed can be switched by pressing or of the meter control
switches to select and pressing or .
Current fuel consumption*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption (after reset*2/after start/after refuel)*1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the hybrid system was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

104

2. Instrument cluster

Average vehicle speed (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the hybrid system was started, respectively
Elapsed time (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the hybrid system was started, respectively
Distance (driving range/after start)*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the hybrid system was started respectively.
· This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
· When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch off, the display may not be updated.
Energy monitor
P. 111
Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire.

The inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be displayed.
Display off
A blank screen is displayed
*1: Displayed when the item is set in "Drive Info 1" or "Drive Info 2". (P. 638) *2: The function can be reset by pressing the of the meter control switches for longer
than 1 second when the item to reset is displayed. If there is more than one item that can be reset, the item selection screen will appear.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

105

Suspension of the settings display

In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be suspended.

When a warning message appears on the multi-information display

When the vehicle begins to move

Tire inflation pressure

It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

"---" may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.

Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals

The drive information will be reset.

Liquid crystal display

P. 101

WARNING

Cautions during setting up the display As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE
The multi-information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
During setting up the display To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while setting up the display features.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

106

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display

Summary of functions
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information onto the windshield.
1 Head-up display
Display brightness will change automatically according to the brightness of the surrounding area.
2 Display position adjustment switch 3 Display brightness adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be adjusted to the desired level.
4 "HUD" button 5 "DISP" button

Head-up display contents

Vehicle speed

Hybrid System Indicator

(P. 108)

Tachometer

Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 208)

Audio display

Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is operated

Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)

(P. 109)

When approaching an intersection while the navigation system is giving route guidance, an arrow will automatically be displayed to indicate the direction of travel.

Lane departure warning display (LDA [Lane Departure Alert with steering

control]) (if equipped)

(P. 270)

: If equipped

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

107

Approach warning display (dynamic radar cruise control) (if equipped)
Pre-collision warning message (pre-collision system) (if equipped)
Speed limit display (vehicles with navigation system)

(P. 240, 253)
(P. 310) (P. 109)

Switching the head-up display

"HUD" button

Pressing the switch turns the headup display on/off and changes the

vehicle speed display units as fol-

lows:

U.S.A.
OFFON (MPH) ON (km/h)OFF

Canada

OFFON (km/h)ON (MPH)OFF

"DISP" button

Pressing the button changes the display items (except vehicle speed).

1 Off

2 Hybrid System Indicator

3 Tachometer

NX300h_U_OM78007U

108

2. Instrument cluster

Making the display easier to see
Adjusting the display position 1 Higher 2 Lower

Setting the brightness The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accordance with the brightness of the surrounding environment. However, the brightness can also be manually adjusted in 9 stages.
1 Brighter
2 Darker

Hybrid System Indicator
1 Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
2 Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.
3 Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
4 Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving, etc.)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster
Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the direction the vehicle should go is guided by the arrow. When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the route guidance will start and the dis-
tance* to the intersection will also be
displayed.
*: The distance indication will disappear
when the vehicle passes through the intersection.
Speed limit display (vehicles with navigation system)
Displays the speed limit for the current road.

109
2

Display customization
The audio display and speed limit display can be shown or hidden.
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.
1 Until the screen changes, continue pressing the "DISP" button, and it will repeat until the item desired to be changed is displayed.
Customization can be performed when the head-up display is on.
2 Press the "DISP" button to switch between on and off.
On and off will be switched between each time the button is pressed. If the button is left alone without being operated for a short time, setting will be finished automatically.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

110

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses. When the head-up display is turned off, it will not display anything until it is turned on again.
When the 12-volt battery is disconnected The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
WARNING
Before using the head-up display Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image's position or brightnessmay obstruct the driver's view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to components Do not place any drinks near the head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result. Do not place anything on or put stickers onto the head-up display projector. Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications. Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector. Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

111

Energy monitor/consumption screen

You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display and the navigation system (if equipped)/Lexus Display Audio system (if equipped).

1 Multi-information display

2 Navigation system screen/Lexus

Display Audio screen (if equipped)

3 "DISP" switch/Meter control switches

Vehicles with a navigation system

4 "MENU" button
5 Touchpad*

Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system

6 "MENU" button

7 Lexus Display Audio controller
(P. 338)
*: For use of the Remote Touch, refer to
"NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

NX300h_U_OM78007U

112

2. Instrument cluster

Energy monitor
Navigation system screen
Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".
If the "Trip Information" or "Past Record" screen is displayed, select "Energy".

Lexus Display Audio screen
Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".
If the "Energy Monitor" screen does not appear, move the controller to the right and select "Energy".

Multi-information display
Press or of the meter control switches and select , and then or to select the energy monitor display.

Navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio screen

Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

113

Navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio screen

Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

When there is no energy flow

Low

Full

Low

Full

Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

114

2. Instrument cluster

Fuel consumption (vehicles with a navigation system or Lexus Display Audio system)
Trip information Navigation system screen
Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".
If the "Energy Monitor" or "Past Record" screen is displayed, select "Trip Information".
1 Resetting the consumption data
2 Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
3 Current fuel consumption
4 Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.
5 Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started.
6 Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.
7 Cruising range (P. 116)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

115

Lexus Display Audio screen

Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".

If the "Trip Information" screen does not appear, move the controller to the right and select "Trip Information".
1 Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes

2 Current fuel consumption

3 Regenerated energy in the past

15 minutes

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.

4 Average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started.

5 Elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.

6 Cruising range (P. 116)

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the power switch was last turned to ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only.
Past record

Navigation system screen

Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".

If the "Energy Monitor" or "Trip Information" screen is displayed, select "Past Record".
1 Resetting the past record data

2 Best recorded fuel consumption

3 Average fuel consumption

4 Previous fuel consumption record

5 Updating the average fuel consumption data

NX300h_U_OM78007U

116

2. Instrument cluster

Lexus Display Audio screen Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select "Info" on the "Menu" screen, and then select "Fuel Consumption".
If the "Past Record" screen does not appear, move the controller to the right and select "Past Record".
1 Previous fuel consumption record 2 Current fuel consumption 3 Best recorded fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only.
Updating the past record data Vehicles with a navigation system Update the average fuel consumption by selecting "Update" to measure the current fuel consumption again. Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system Update the average fuel consumption by moving the controller to the left and select "Update" to measure the current fuel consumption again.
Resetting the data Vehicles with a navigation system The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting "Clear". Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system The fuel consumption data can be deleted by moving the controller to the left and select "Clear".
Cruising range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

117

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information Keys ....................................................118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors .......................................124 Back door........................................129 Smart access system with
push-button start...................... 140
3-3. Adjusting the seats Front seats...................................... 146 Rear seats........................................147 Driving position memory......... 154 Head restraints ............................ 158
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............................. 160 Inside rear view mirror................ 161 Outside rear view mirrors....... 163
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows............................ 166 Moon roof .......................................169

NX300h_U_OM78007U

118

3-1. Key information

Keys

The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
1 Electronic keys · Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 140) · Operating the wireless remote control function
2 Mechanical keys
3 Key number plate
4 Card key (electronic key) (if equipped)
Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 140)

Wireless remote control
1 Locks all the doors (P. 124) 2 Unlocks all the doors (P. 124) 3 Opens the windows and moon
roof*1, 2 (P. 124)
4 Opens and closes the power back
door*1 (P. 129)
5 Sounds the alarm (P. 119)
*1: If equipped *2: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 592)

3-1. Key information

119

Panic mode

When

is pressed for longer than about

1 second, an alarm will sound intermittently and

the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person

from trying to break into or damage your vehi-

cle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

120

3-1. Key information

Card key (if equipped) The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the card key does not operate properly. If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the release button using a pen tip, etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin, etc.
To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it while pressing the release button.

If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
The card key is not waterproof. When required to leave the vehicle's key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 447) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. If you lose your mechanical keys New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. When riding in an aircraft When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag, etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-1. Key information

121

Electronic key battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a half.)

If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops.

As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 532)

· The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate.
· The detection area becomes smaller. · The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

· TVs · Personal computers

· Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

· Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

· Induction cookers

· Table lamps

Replacing the battery

P. 532

Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

122

3-1. Key information

NOTICE
To prevent key damage Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time. Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc. Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. Do not disassemble the keys. Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key. Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
Carrying the electronic key on your person Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other keyrelated problems Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the card key, to your Lexus dealer.
When an electronic key is lost If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that were provided with your vehicle.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-1. Key information

123

NOTICE

Handling the card key

Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing so may damage the card key.

If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key may stop working. If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water, etc., is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery.

Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.

When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.

The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:

· The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys. · The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil. · The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

124

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch.

Locking and unlocking the doors from the outside
Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
1 Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door. Grip any passenger door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 127,635)
2 Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the surface of the door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.,
Wireless remote control
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. Press and hold to open the windows
and moon roof*1, 2 *1: If equipped *2: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

125

Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Windows: A buzzer sounds to indicate that all windows are opening.
Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
Welcome light illumination control The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in the "AUTO" position.
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle 3 When the door can not be locked even if the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm. When gloves are being worn, remove the gloves.

Door lock buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
Setting the alarm Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 88)
If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (P. 592) Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 532)

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside Door lock switch
1 Locks all the doors 2 Unlocks all the doors

Inside lock buttons
1 Locks the door 2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position. 2 Close the door. The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. 1 Unlock 2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

127

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 634.

Function

Operation

Speed linked door locking function

All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Shift position linked door locking function

All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever out of P.

Shift position linked door unlocking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked

when shifting the shift lever to P.

All doors are automatically unlocked

when driver's door is opened.

Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the power switch off.

2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,

for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2 .)

Multi-information display

Unlocking function

Beep

Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.
Exterior: Beeps 3 times Holding any of the passenger Interior: Pings once door handles unlocks all the doors.

Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice

all the doors.

Interior: Pings once

For vehicles with an alarm: To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 88)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.
Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 592)
Open door warning buzzer If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that door(s) or the hood in not fully closed. The open door(s) or hood is displayed on the multi-information display.
Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control P. 142
Customization Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 633)
WARNING

To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked. Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
When opening or closing a door Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Back door

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

129

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures.

Locking and unlocking the back door

Smart access system with push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

1 Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

2 Unlocks all the doors

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

Wireless remote control

P. 124

Door lock switch

P. 126

Opening/closing the back door with the wireless remote control (vehicles with a power back door)
Press the switch for 1 second.
With the customization feature, it can be set up so that it can operate even when the back door is unlocked. (P. 636)

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Opening/closing the back door from inside the vehicle (vehicles with a power back door)
Press the switch for 1 second.
A buzzer sounds and the back door automatically opens and closes. Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation. When the switch is pressed again for 1 second during the halted operation, the back door will perform the reverse operation.

Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Back door opener
Vehicles without a power back door
Raise the back door while pressing up the back door opener switch.
Vehicles with a power back door
When the back door is unlocked: Press the back door opener switch. When the back door is locked: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the back door opener switch.
A buzzer sounds and the back door automatically opens. Pressing the switch while the back door is opening stops the operation.
Wireless remote control (vehicles with a power back door)
P. 129

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

131

Closing the back door from outside the vehicle (vehicles with a power back door)
Pressing the switch.
A buzzer sounds and the back door automatically closes. Pressing the switch while the back door is closing stops the operation. Pressing the switch again will reverse the operation.

When closing the back door

Vehicles without a power back door

Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.

Vehicles with a power back door
Lower the back door using the back door handle, then a buzzer sounds and the back door automatically closes.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with a power back door)

ON (operate) and OFF (stop) can be switched between by the "settings display" (P. 102) of the multi-information display.

1 Pressing or of the meter control switches (P. 103), selects

2 ON and OFF will be switched over with presses of on the meter control switch.

When OFF is selected and the operations of the power back door is made to

stop, select

and turn ON from the "settings display" of multi-informa-

tion display, and unless it is put in a system operating state, the operation of the

power back door will not return. (No return in the power switch operation)

Adjusting the open position of the back door (vehicles with a power back door)

The open position of the power back door can be adjusted.

When setting with the

switch

1 Stop the back door in the desirable position. (P. 130, 131)

2 Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for 2 seconds.
· When the settings are completed, the buzzer sounds 4 times.
· When opening the back door the next time, the back door will stop at that position.

When setting by the navigation system The opening position can be set with the navigation system. (P. 641) Priority for the stop position is given to the last position set by either the switch or with navigation system. To return the adjusted open position to the initial settings position. (P. 134)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

133

Power back door operating conditions (vehicles with a power back door) With the power back door operations set to ON, it can automatically open and close for the following conditions:
When the electronic key is being carried and the power back door switch is pushed* When the wireless remote control is used*
When the power switch is in ON mode, in addition to the above for the opening operations, the back door operates for any of the following conditions:

· Parking brake is engaged · The brake pedal is depressed · The shift lever is in P
*: When configured with the customization function so that it can be operated after
being unlocked, operate the back door after it has been unlocked.

Luggage compartment light The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with the luggage

compartment light switch on.

1 Off 2 On
When the power switch is turned off, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

If the back door opener is inoperative The back door can be unlocked from the inside.
1 Remove the cover. To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver and the cover as shown in the illustration.

2 Move the lever.

Vehicles without a power back Vehicles with a power back

door

NX300h_U_OM78007U

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door) In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. Whatever the state of the power switch, the back door closer operates.
Operation of the power back door (vehicles with a power back door) A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door is opening/closing. When the power back door operations are OFF, the power back door does not operate but it can be opened and closed by hand. When the power back door automatically opens, if an abnormality due to people or objects is detected, operation will stop.
Back door reserve lock function (vehicles with a power back door) This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, beforehand, when the back door is open. When the follow is done, all the doors except the back door are locked and then back door will also be locked at the same time it is closed. 1 Close all doors, except the back door. 2 Push the wireless lock button during the automatic closing operation of the back door.
When reconnecting the 12-volt battery (vehicles with a power back door) To enable the power back door to operate properly, close the back door manually.
Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door)
Sensors are installed in the right and left sides of the power back door. When the door is automatically closing and the sensors are pushed due to an object being clamped, etc., the jam protection function operates. From that position the door automatically moves a little in the opposite direction and then the function stops.

Returning the back door automatic stop position to the initial settings (vehicles with a power back door) Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door for 7 seconds. After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it sounds twice more. When the power back door does the opening operation the next time, the door will open to the initial settings position.

Customization (vehicles with a power back door) Settings (e.g. back door automatic open and stop position) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 641)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

135

WARNING

Caution while driving

Keep the back door closed while driving. If the back door is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.

Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion or other injuries.

Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING
Operating the back door Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened. When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close. Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
Vehicles without a power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secured before using the luggage compartment.
Vehicles with a power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully, while on a steep incline. Make sure that the back door is secured before using the luggage compartment.
When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers, etc., from being caught.
When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.
Do not pull on the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) (P. 138) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door) (P. 139) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door). Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door) to break, causing an accident.
If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may suddenly shut closed again after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

137

WARNING

Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door) In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to get fingers caught or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back door system is canceled.

Power back door (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

If the power back door system is canceled while the back door is operating during automatic operation, the back door stops operating. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.

If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door may move abruptly.

On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens automatically. Make sure the back door is secured.

In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may suddenly open or close, causing an accident.

· When the back door contacts an obstacle · When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power switch
is turned to ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power
back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may move slightly in the closing direction after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, ask your Lexus dealer for details.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

138

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING
Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to get fingers caught or anything else. The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

NOTICE

Back door damper stays (vehicles without a power back door) The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Damper stays

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

139

NOTICE

Back door spindles (vehicles with a power back door) The back door is equipped with spindles that hold the back door in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door spindle, resulting in malfunction.

Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the spindle rod.

Do not touch the spindle rod with gloves or other fabric items.

Do not attach heavy accessories to the back

door. When attaching, ask your Lexus dealer for details.

Spindles

Do not place your hand on the spindle or apply lateral forces to it.

To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with a power back door)

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.

To prevent damage to the power back door (if equipped)

Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.

Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not close automatically.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

140

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart access system with push-button start

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 124) Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 129) Starts and stops the hybrid system (P. 201)
Antenna location 1 Antennas outside the cabin 2 Antennas inside the cabin 3 Antenna inside the luggage compartment 4 Antenna outside the luggage compartment

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

141

Alarms and warning messages A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 572) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm

Situation

Correction procedure

Exterior

alarm

sounds once for 5

seconds

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

The power switch was turned to

ACCESSORY mode while the

Interior alarm pings driver's door was open (The Turn the power switch off 3

repeatedly

driver's door was opened when and close the driver's door.

the power switch was in

ACCESSORY mode).

When "Smart Access System Malfunction See Owner's Manual" will be displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take some time to unlock the doors. · The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer. · The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer. If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver's door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

142

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Electronic Key battery-Saving Function When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system use weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 592) When the electronic key battery is depleted Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects · Cards to which aluminum foil is attached · Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside · Metallic wallets or bags · Coins · Hand warmers made of metal · Media such as CDs and DVDs When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves · Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices · Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves · Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) · Digital audio players · Portable game systems If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

143

Note for the entry function

Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

· The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
· The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the back door is opened.
· The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage room, floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch modes are changed.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or

unlocked by anyone.

Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction

procedures to wash the vehicle:

· Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
· Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 142)
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

144

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance. (P. 635)
To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not operate.)
If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 592) Starting the hybrid system: P. 593
Customization Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 633)
If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 124, 592) Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: P. 593 Stopping the hybrid system: P. 202

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

145

Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA FCC ID: HYQ14CBB

FCC ID: NI4TMLF12-3

NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

WARNING

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapypacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 140) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

146

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats

Adjustment procedure
1 Seat position adjustment switch 2 Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-
ment switch 3 Vertical height adjustment switch 4 Seatback angle adjustment switch 5 Lumbar support adjustment switch
(for driver's side)

Power easy access system The driver's seat and steering wheel move in accordance with power switch mode and the driver's seat belt condition. (P. 154)
WARNING
When adjusting the seat position Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Rear seats
Adjustment procedure
Manual seat

3-3. Adjusting the seats

147

3
1 Reclining adjustment Power seat

Operation of each component

1 Reclining adjustment (only rear seat switch)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

148

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Folding down the rear seatbacks
Before folding down the rear seatbacks 1 Stow the rear center seat belt and seat belt buckles. (P. 34) 2 Lower the head restraint of the rear seat. (P. 158)
Folding down rear seatbacks (manual seat) Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever and fold down the seatback.

Folding down rear seatbacks (power seat)

Press and hold the switch to fold down the seatback.

The buzzer sounds and operations start. The buzzer sounds again when the operation is complete. To stop the operation of a seat partway, press either seat operation switch for that seat, once more. Switches for that seat in other locations can be used to stop the operations. (buzzer sounds depending on stopping position of the seatback)

Instrument panel switch

Rear seat switch

When the seatback is collapsed to the rear, put the seatback in the most upright position and press the switch once again.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Luggage room switch

3-3. Adjusting the seats

149

Returning the rear seatbacks (manual seat)

1 Raise the rear seatback until it locks.

2 Check that the plate for the seat belt is on the front side of the seat.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

150

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Returning the rear seatbacks (power seat)

1 Press and hold the switch to return the seatback.

Instrument panel switch

Rear seat switch

Luggage room switch

2 Check that the plate for the seat belt is on the front side of the seat.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-3. Adjusting the seats

151

Operating conditions for reclining adjustment (power seat) When the following conditions are met, switch operations are possible.

When the seatback position is within the range of illustration A.
When the operating switches for the seat to be operate are not being pressed.

Most upright position

Operating conditions for folding down the seatback (power seat) When the following conditions are met, switch operations are possible.

When operating the rear seat switch: The seatback position is within the range of illustration A.

Most upright

position

When operating the instrument panel switch or luggage compartment switch: The seatback position is within the range of illustration B.

When operating the rear seat switch: When the rear door for the seat to be operated is open.

When operating the luggage compartment switch: When the back door is open. When the operating switches for the seat to be operate are not being pressed. When the power switch is in ON mode, in addition to the above, the power seat operates for any of the following conditions:
· Parking brake is engaged · The brake pedal is depressed · The shift lever is in P Operating conditions for returning the seatback (power seat) When the following conditions are met, switch operations are possible.

When operating the rear seat switch: When the seatback position is within the range of illustration A.
When operating the rear seat switch: When the rear door for the seat to be operated is open.

Most upright position

When operating the luggage compartment switch: When the back door is open.

When the operating switches for the seat to be operate are not being pressed. When the power switch is in ON mode, in addition to the above, the power seat operates for any of the following conditions:
· Parking brake is engaged · The brake pedal is depressed · The shift lever is in P

NX300h_U_OM78007U

152

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Reclining adjustment (power seat) Stop the seatback partway. To set the seatback to the rearmost position, press the button again.

Power seat operations (if equipped) If the seat has a cover or seat cushion, it may not operate properly. Also, when folding down the seat, check that there is nothing on the rear seat that would interfere with the operation.
Seatback jam protection function (power seat) When folding down the seatback, if a foreign object is perceived between the seatback and seat cushion, the seatback will reverse operations and then stops operations. The buzzer sounds intermittently during reverse operations and sounds continuously when operations are stopped.
WARNING
When folding the rear seatbacks down and after folded Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving. Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving. Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
When operating the seatback Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Keep other passengers from being hit with the seatback. Do not bring your hands close to the moving parts or between the seats, as well as do not let any part of your body get caught. Vehicles with a power seat: Do not let children operate the seatback as other passengers may get caught in seat. Vehicles with a power seat: Check that there are no passengers sitting in the seat before folding that seat forward. Also, do let other passengers sit in the seat while the seat is forward folding.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-3. Adjusting the seats

153

WARNING

Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back

and forth.

Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

Jam protection function (vehicles with a power seat)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the seatback is fully folded forward. Be careful not to get fingers caught or anything else.

The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

NOTICE
Stowing the seat belts The seat belts and the buckles for the rear center seat, as well as the armrest, must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks. (P. 34, 465)

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

154

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory

This feature automatically adjusts the front seats, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.
Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.
When all of the following have been performed, the driver's seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter
and exit the vehicle easily.
· The shift lever has been shifted to P. · The power switch has been turned
off. · The driver's seat belt has been unfastened.
When any of the following has been performed, the driver's seat and steering wheel automatically return to their original positions. · The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode. · The driver's seat belt has been fastened.
Operation of the power easy access system When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already close to the rearmost position, etc.
Customization The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be customized. (Customizable features: P. 633)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

3-3. Adjusting the seats

155

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.

Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

Recording procedure

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.

2 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

3 Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to the

desired positions.

4 While pressing the "SET" button,

or within 3 seconds after the

"SET" button is pressed, press

button "1", "2" or "3" until the

buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

Recall procedure 1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

156

3-3. Adjusting the seats

To stop the position recall operation part-way through Perform any of the following: Press the "SET" button. Press button "1", "2" or "3". Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall). Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall).
Seat positions that can be memorized (P. 146) The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be recorded.
Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.
In order to correctly use the driving position memory function If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
Memory recall function
Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.
Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button "1", "2" or "3" before performing the following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver's door. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
3 Recall the driving position that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-3. Adjusting the seats

157

Recall procedure

1 Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver's door using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering wheel). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle easier. If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.
2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode or ON mode, or fasten a seat belt.

The seat and steering wheel will move to the recorded position.

Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled

properly.

1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

2 While pressing the "SET" button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.

If it could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried. If a door other than the driver's door is unlocked with the smart access system with push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.
Customization The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized. (Customizable features: P. 633)
WARNING

Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

158

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button
Rear seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button
Removing the head restraints Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button. If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat height or angle. (P. 146, 147)
Lock release button

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-3. Adjusting the seats

159

Installing the head restraints Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button
Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats) Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. 3

Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
WARNING
Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

160

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions: 1 Up 2 Down 3 Toward the driver 4 Away from the driver

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to

the

mark.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode*. *: If the driver's seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
power switch mode. Automatic adjustment of the steering position (if equipped)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (P. 155) Power easy access system The steering wheel and driver's seat move in accordance with power switch mode and the driver's seat belt condition. (P. 154)
WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

161

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture. Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
3

Anti-glare function

Type A
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode
On/off
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode. Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator

NX300h_U_OM78007U

162

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Type B
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

On/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates. The function will set to ON mode each time the power switch is turned to ON mode. Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator

To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do Type A not touch or cover them.

Type B

WARNING Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

163

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure
1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch. 1 Left 2 Right

3
2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch. 1 Up 2 Right 3 Down 4 Left
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

164

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)
When the mirror select switch is in the "L" or "R" position, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, move the mirror select switch to the neutral position (between "L" or "R")
Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change. When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

Mirror angle can be adjusted when The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
When the mirrors are fogged up The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 435)
Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory) A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (P. 154)
Auto anti-glare function (if equipped) When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 161)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

165

WARNING

When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

166

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening* *: To stop the window partway, operate the
switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the passenger window.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

167

The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Up jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

Down jam protection function

When the window is opening, if a foreign object malfunction within the door causes it to be clamped, the operation stops.

When opening and closing the window can not be done When the up or down jam protection function operates unusually or the door window

can not be fully opened and closed, perform the following operations with the power

window switch of that door.

Stop the vehicle, with the power switch in ON mode, continually operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing position within 4 seconds after the up jam or down jam protection function was activated. Otherwise, by continually operating the power window switch in the one-touch opening position, the door window can be opened and closed.

If the door window can not be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, implement the following procedure for function initialization.

1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position and completely close the door window.

3 Release the power window switch for a moment and then resume pulling and holding the switch in the one-touch closing position for approximately 4 seconds.

4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position and after the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

5 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position, once more, and after the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window movement does not reverse and can not be closed or completely open, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 593) The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 124) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

168

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows open warning buzzer The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the power windows open.
Customization Setting (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 633)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. Closing the windows
The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (P. 166)
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
Up jam protection function Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the up jam protection function. The up jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
Down jam protection function Never allow passengers to use hands, arms, cloths, etc., to intentionally activate the down jam protection function. The down jam protection function may not work if a foreign object gets caught just before the window completely opens. Be careful not to get hands, arms, clothes, etc., caught in the window.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Moon roof

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

169

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Opening and closing

1 Opens the moon roof

Press and hold the "OPEN" switch. The
mauotoomn aroticoaf ltlyil.t*s up and then fully opens

2 Closes the moon roof

Pmroeossnarnodofhfoulldlytchleos"CesLaOutSoEm" astwicitaclhly..*The

*: Lightly press either end of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

1 Tilts the moon roof up

Press and hold the "UP" switch. It auto-
mtioant.i*cally opens until the tilt up stop posi-
2 Tilts the moon roof down

Press and The moon

rohoofldfultlhcelos"De aOuWtomNa"tiscwaliltyc.*h.

*: Lightly press either end of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Operation of each component

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

170

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

The moon roof can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode.
Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 593) The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 124) *: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
When the moon roof does not close normally Perform the following procedure:

If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

1 Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold The moon roof

the will

"CLOSE" switch.*1
close, reopen and pause

for

approximately

seconds.*2

Then

will close again and tilt down. Finally it will stop.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof completely stops and then release the switch.

If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up 1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the "DOWN" switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt
up position.*2 Then it will close again. Finally it will stop.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof has completely stopped and then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be per-
formed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, perform the moon roof initialization by
referring to "When tilt up/down or moon roof opening and closing can be done but
automatic full opening and closing can not be done" on P. 171.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Operation of each component

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

171

When the moon roof does not move normally

When the opening and closing operation or automatic opening function of the moon roof does not move normally, perform the following initialization procedures.

1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

2 Operate the moon roof. The initialization method changes depending on the contents that can be operated.

If only the tilt up operations can be done when the moon roof is closed

3 Press and hold the "DOWN" or "CLOSE" switch. Open until the tilt up stop position. After that the moon roof opens and completely closes. After that tilt up once again and stop at the completely closed position.

4 Confirm that moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.

If the moon roof can only be closed when the moon roof is partially opened

3 Press and hold the "DOWN" or "CLOSE" switch. Fully close the moon roof, tilt up and open it close to the fully open position. After

that, fully close the moon roof and tilt up once again, then stop the moon roof in the

fully closed position.

4 Confirm that moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.

When tilt up/down or moon roof opening and closing can be done but automatic full opening and closing can not be done

3 Press the "OPEN" switch and fully open.

4 Press the "CLOSE" switch and fully close.

5 Press the "UP" switch and tilt up until the tilt up stop position.

6 Press the "DOWN" switch and tilt down.

If the switch is released before any step is completes, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning. If the opening and closing operations or automatic opening function does not move as normal, even after performing the above mentioned operations, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Customization

Setting (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 633)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

172

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. Opening the moon roof
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
Do not sit on top of the moon roof. Closing the moon roof
The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
When using the mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the power switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
Jam protection function Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

173
Driving 4

4-1. Before driving Driving the vehicle ....................... 174 Cargo and luggage .................... 182 Vehicle load limits .......................186 Trailer towing (vehicles with towing package)....................... 187 Trailer towing (vehicles without towing package) ......199 Dinghy towing............................. 200
4-2. Driving procedures Power (ignition) switch..............201 EV drive mode ........................... 206 Hybrid transmission ................. 208 Turn signal lever ........................... 212 Parking brake................................ 213 Brake hold ...................................... 216 ASC (Active Sound Control).........218
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch.......................... 219 Automatic High Beam .............223 Fog light switch............................ 227 Windshield wipers and
washer..........................................228 Rear window wiper and
washer..........................................234

4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .....236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control .........................................240
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ............................................253
Cruise control ..............................267
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) ............ 270
Intuitive parking assist .............. 279
Lexus parking assist monitor........................................ 287
Driving mode select switch ...........................................303
Driving assist systems...............305
PCS (Pre-Collision System)........... 310
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)...... 316
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ................................................. 324
Winter driving tips ..................... 326
Utility vehicle precautions......330

NX300h_U_OM78007U

174

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system
P. 201
Driving
1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 208) 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 214)
If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is released automatically when shifting the shift lever to any position other than P. (P. 213)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. (P. 214)
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P. 208)
Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 208) 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 214)
If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is set automatically when shifting the shift lever to P. (P. 213)
4 Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system. 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

175

Starting off on a uphill
1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 208) 2 Pull the parking brake switch and parking brake is set manually. (P. 214) 3 Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to acceler-
ate the vehicle. 4 Press the parking brake switch and parking brake is released manually.
(P. 214)

When starting off on a uphill The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 305)
For fuel-efficient driving Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary to refrain from activities such as sudden acceleration. (P. 324)
Driving in the rain Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may 4 become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Restraining the hybrid system output (Brake Override System) When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the hybrid system output may be restrained. A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control) When the following unusual operation is performed, the hybrid system output may be restrained. · When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. · When the accelerator pedal is depressed too while the vehicle is in reverse. While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC (P. 307) to cancel DriveStart Control so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

176

4-1. Before driving

Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended: For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. For the first 1000 miles (1600 km): · Do not drive at extremely high speeds. · Avoid sudden acceleration. · Do not drive continuously in low gears. · Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. Vehicles with towing package For the first 500miles (800 km): Do not tow a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 618)
Eco-friendly driving P. 100
WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. When driving the vehicle Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator ped-
als to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. · Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident. · When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to difficulty in operat-
ing the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. · Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only
slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. · Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using
your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only
by the electric motor (traction motor). As there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle's movement. Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

177

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When driving the vehicle
During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 557
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 208)
Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not 4 outside the vehicle.
AWD models: Do not drive the vehicle off-road. This is not an AWD vehicle designed for off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
Do not drive across a river or through other bodies of water. This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the hybrid system or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

178

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
When shifting the shift lever Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle. Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected. Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to any position other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-1. Before driving

179

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. When the vehicle is stopped Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the shift lever is in any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while stopped with the "READY" indicator is illuminated, and apply the parking brake as necessary. If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely 4 apply the parking brake as needed. Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby. When the vehicle is parked Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: · Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. · The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic mate-
rial of glasses to deform or crack. · Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the
vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as
the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle. Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire. Always shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the "READY" indicator is illuminated. Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the "READY" indicator is illuminated or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

180

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. When braking When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. If the electronically controlled brake function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. If the vehicle becomes stuck (AWD models) Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

181

NOTICE

When driving the vehicle

Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, the hybrid system output may be restrained.

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 575)

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling

Short in electrical components

Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following:

Brake function

Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmission, etc.

Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

182

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) -- (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P. 186)
Vehicles without towing package: Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Calculation formula for your vehicle
1 Cargo capacity 2 Total load capacity (vehicle capacity
weight) (P. 608)

4-1. Before driving

183

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle,

which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A = Weight of people *2: B = Total load capacity

*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg) *4: D = Additional weight of people *5: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

184

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment: Receptacles containing gasoline Aerosol cans
Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident. Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible. Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks. When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations. · At the feet of the driver · On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) · On the luggage cover · On the instrument panel · On the dashboard Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
Capacity and distribution Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
When using a roof luggage carrier (vehicles with roof rails) Observe the following precautions: Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles. If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (P. 608) Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier. Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Do not exceed 176.3 lb. (80 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

185

NOTICE
When loading cargo (vehicles with a moon roof) Do not set luggage on the moon roof. Failure to observe so may lead to cause damage.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

186

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): P. 608
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (Vehicles with towing package):
P. 190, 608 TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (Vehicles without towing package)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 525)
WARNING
Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

187

Trailer towing (vehicles with towing package)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance

with your trailer's characteristics and operating conditions.

Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a

trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

188

4-1. Before driving

Towing related terms

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

189

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

(With brakes)

TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, towing package (if available), hitch and hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake

(Without brakes)

system.

Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. (P. 191)

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

190

4-1. Before driving

Weight limits
The gross trailer weight must never exceed 1500 lb. (680 kg). The gross combination weight must never exceed 6835 lb. (3100 kg).
The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.
The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.
GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
GCWR*
6835 lb. (3100 kg)
TWR*
1500 lb. (680 kg)
Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (450 kg)
*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per
SAE J2807.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

191

Trailer Tongue Weight
A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions. · Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)
1 Gross trailer weight
2 Tongue weight

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer. Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your
vehicle. Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer. Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease. Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing
the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

192

4-1. Before driving

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
1 Weight carrying ball position: 42.1 in. (1069.9 mm)
2 Hitch receiver pin hole position: 33.7 in. (855.6 mm)

Connecting trailer lights
Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle's lights. Please take care to comply with your state's laws when installing trailer lights.
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing: Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the
posted towing speed limit. Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h)
on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control. Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance. Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicletrailer combination.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

193

Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the

trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This

is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or

prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the

risk of an accident.

As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least

one vehicle and trailer length.

Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turn.

Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle

wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.

Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be

sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D. (P. 208)

Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden

downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking

efficiency.

Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85F [30C]) when driving up a long or steep

grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, imme-

diately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and

stop in a safe spot. (P. 600)

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

194

4-1. Before driving

Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and the trailer's wheels when parking. Put the transmission in P and apply the parking brake. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and trailer's wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4 Shift into P and apply the parking brake.
5 Turn off the hybrid system.

When restarting after parking on a slope:
1 With the transmission in P, start the hybrid system. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
3 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. (P. 214)
4 Release the brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the blocks.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

195

Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball
4
Before towing Check that the following conditions are met: Ensure that your vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (P. 615) Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation. All trailer lights work as required by law. All lights work each time you connect them. The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer. The trailer is level when it is hitched. Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes. The trailer cargo is securely loaded. The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

196

4-1. Before driving

Break-in schedule If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km). After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
Maintenance If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See "Warranty and Services Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".) Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
If trailer sway occurs One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability. If trailer swaying occurs: · Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead. Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel. · Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. After the trailer swaying has stopped: · Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle. · Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer. · Check the load in the trailer. Make sure the load has not shifted. Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible. · Check the load in the vehicle. Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in. If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination. Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

197

WARNING

Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.

To avoid accident or injury

Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.

Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit

for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Slow

down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc.

to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing

a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the

speed of which you experience the instability. Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

Do not use the following systems when trailer towing.

· Cruise control (if equipped) · Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) · Dynamic cruise control with full-speed range (if equipped) Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

Vehicles with a compact spare tire: Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

198

4-1. Before driving

WARNING
When towing a trailer Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness. Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE
When installing a trailer hitch Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
Do not directly splice trailer lights Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-1. Before driving

199

Trailer towing (vehicles without towing package)

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

200 4-1. Before driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground. To prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission and AWD system
(AWD models) 2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the hybrid transmission. AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the hybrid transmission and AWD system.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Power (ignition) switch

4-2. Driving procedures

201

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch modes.

Starting the hybrid system
1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Check that the shift lever is in P. 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system

cannot be started.

4 Press the power switch.
If the "READY" indicator turns on, the hybrid system will operate normally. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the "READY" indicator is illuminated. The hybrid system can be started from any power switch mode.

5 Check that the "READY" indicator is illuminated.
The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

202 4-2. Driving procedures Stopping the hybrid system
1 Stop the vehicle completely. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 208) 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 214)
If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is set automatically when
shifting the shift lever to P. (P. 213) 4 Press the power switch. 5 Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instrument cluster is
off.
Changing power switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
1 Off*
The emergency flashers can be used.
2 ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. "ACCESSORY" will be displayed on the multi-information display.
3 ON mode
All electrical components can be used. "IGNITION ON" will be displayed on the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than
P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-2. Driving procedures 203
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off: 1 Check that the parking brake is set. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Check that "Turn Off Vehicle" is displayed on the multi-information display
and then press the power switch once. 4 Check that "Turn Off Vehicle" on the multi-information display is off.

Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the

hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt

battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in ACCESSORY or

ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

P. 80

Electronic key battery depletion

P. 121

When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

When starting the hybrid system, the flashing time of the "READY" indicator may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the "READY" indicator is steady on, as steady means the vehicle is able to move.

Conditions affecting operation

P. 142

Note for the entry function

P. 143

If the hybrid system does not start

The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 86) Contact your Lexus dealer.

Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. "To Start Vehicle, Put Shift Lever into P" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Steering lock

After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

204 4-2. Driving procedures
When the steering lock cannot be released A message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is in P. Press the power switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.
Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
When "Smart Access System Malfunction See Owner's Manual" is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
If the "READY" indicator does not come on In the event that the "READY" indicator does not come on even after performing the proper procedures for starting the vehicle, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
If the hybrid system is malfunctioning P. 82
If the electronic key battery is depleted P. 532
Operation of the power switch When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the power switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.
If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated by a customized setting P. 593
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-2. Driving procedures 205

WARNING

When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. The steering lock function will activate and this may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press

and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more

in succession. (P. 557)

However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning

the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,

however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer

smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on. If "ACCESSORY" or "IGNITION ON" is displayed on the multi-information display while the hybrid system is not operating, the power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off. Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.
When starting the hybrid system If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

206 4-2. Driving procedures
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, electric power is supplied by the hybrid battery (traction battery), and only the electric motor (traction motor) is used to drive the vehicle. This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots, etc., without concern for noises and gas emissions. Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).
Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The temperature of the hybrid system is high. The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc. The temperature of the hybrid system is low. The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32 F (0 C) for a long period of time, etc. The gasoline engine is warming up. The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. The remaining battery level indicated in the "Energy Monitor" display is low. (P. 112) Vehicle speed is high. The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill, etc. The windshield defogger is in use.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-2. Driving procedures 207

Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. After the hybrid system has started and the "READY" indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound, the EV drive mode indicator will go off after flashing, and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. The remaining battery level indicated in the "Energy Monitor" display is low. (P. 112)

Vehicle speed is high.

The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill, etc.

Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode's possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to approxi-

mately 0.6 mile (1 km). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used. (The distance that is possible depends on the

hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

WARNING

Caution while driving When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

208 4-2. Driving procedures
Hybrid transmission
Shifting the shift lever

While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.
Shift position purpose

Shift position

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving*1

S mode driving*2 (P. 209)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driv-
ing.
*2: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating force and engine
braking force.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-2. Driving procedures 209 Selecting the driving mode
P. 303
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of your choice. The shift range can be selected by operating the shift lever. 1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting The selected shift range, from 1 to 6, will be displayed.
The initial shift range in S mode is 4. 4
Shift ranges and their functions You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine braking force. A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

210

4-2. Driving procedures

S mode When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward "+" sets the shift range to 6. Automatically selects a higher shift range before the engine speed becomes too high.
Downshifting restriction warning buzzer To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
When driving with cruise control (if equipped), dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (if equipped) activated Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control, dynamic radar cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled. While driving in S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (P. 209) When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (P. 303)
Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control) When the following unusual operation is performed, the hybrid system output may be restrained. When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. When the accelerator pedal is depressed too while the vehicle is in reverse.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 591

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-2. Driving procedures

211

WARNING
When driving on slippery road surfaces Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

NOTICE
Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charging, even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

212

4-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4 Left turn

Turn signals can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode.
If the indicator flashes faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Parking brake

4-2. Driving procedures

213

A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.

Automatic mode

The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever operation. Even when in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set and released manually. (P. 214)

1 Turns automatic mode on (while the

vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the

parking brake switch until the automatic mode lamp turns on)

U.S.A. Canada

· When the shift lever is moved out of

P, the parking brake will be released,

and the parking brake indicator light

and parking brake lamp turn off.

· When the shift lever is moved into P,

the parking brake will be set, and the

parking brake indicator light and

parking brake lamp turn on. Operate the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

Automatic mode lamp

2 Turns automatic mode off (while the

vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until the automatic mode lamp turns off)

Parking brake lamp

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

214

4-2. Driving procedures

Manual mode

The parking brake can be set and released manually.

1 Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp will turn on. Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.
2 Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. Make sure that the parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp turn off.
If the parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp flashes, operate the switch again. (P. 566)

U.S.A. Canada

Parking brake lamp

Parking brake operation When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch. When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.
If "Parking Brake Overheated Parking Brake Unavailable" is displayed on the multiinformation display If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
Parking brake operation sound When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp will turn on and stay on as described below: ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released. Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds. When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake lamp will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-2. Driving procedures

215

Changing the mode When changing the automatic mode on/off, the message will be shown on the multiinformation display and the buzzer sounds.
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. "Release Parking Brake" is displayed on the multi-information display.
Warning messages and buzzers Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
If the brake system warning light comes on P. 565
Usage in winter time P. 327
WARNING

When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released uninten-

tionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
When parking the vehicle Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move.
When the system malfunctions Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle inspected by contact your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

216

4-2. Driving procedures

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator (green) comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) comes on.

Brake hold system operating conditions The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions: The back door or hood is not closed. The driver's door is not closed. The driver is not wearing the seat belt. If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
Brake hold function If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display. To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes The parking brake will not be released automatically. With the brake pedal depressed, release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. (P. 213)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-2. Driving procedures

217

If "Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Warning messages and buzzers Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
If the brake hold operated indicator flashes P. 566
WARNING

When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been

exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE
When parking the vehicle The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the power switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

218

4-2. Driving procedures

ASC (Active Sound Control)

The ASC system is an electronic sound system that generates engine sound, conveying the kinetic situations of the vehicle's acceleration and deceleration to the driver through the speakers inside the instrument panel. The vehicle's response to the driver's acceleration behavior and shift operations are also conveyed in sound. When sport mode is selected, the sound conveyed to the driver will be louder.

Controlling volume
1 Louder 2 Lower
The indicator comes on when the ASC system is on. When the dial is turned to the lowest volume, the ASC system will be turned off and the indicator will go off.

The ASC system can be operated when The driving mode select switch is in normal mode or sport mode.
Temporary cancelation of the ASC system functions The ASC system may be temporarily canceled depending on the driving conditions, such as when the tires slip due to sudden acceleration.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

Headlight switch

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

Type A

The side marker, parking,

tail, license plate, daytime

running lights, instrument

panel and switch lights turn

on.

The headlights and all the

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights) turn

on.

The headlights and all the

lights listed above turn on

and off automatically (when

the power switch is in ON

mode).

The daytime running lights

turn off.

219
4

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

220 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B

The side marker, parking,

tail, license plate, daytime

running lights, instrument

panel and switch lights turn

on.

The headlights and all the

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights) turn

on.

The headlights and all the

lights listed above turn on

and off automatically (when

the power switch is in ON

mode).

The daytime running lights

turn on.

Turning on the high beam headlights
1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

221

Daytime running light system To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front parking lights turn on automatically (at an increased intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. Type A only: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the headlight switch to "DRL OFF" position. If a turn signal light is in use, the daytime running light, on the same side, is turned off. For emergency flashers, both are turned off.
Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

Automatic light off system

When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)

When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver's door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch off

once and then back to

Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

12-volt battery-saving function

In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the power switch is turned off the 12-volt battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes. When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving function will be disabled.

When any of the following are performed, the 12-volt battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the 12-volt battery-saving function has been reactivated:

When the headlight switch is operated

When a door is opened or closed

NX300h_U_OM78007U

222

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Customization Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 636)
NOTICE

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

223

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

1 Push the lever away from you with

the headlight switch in

position.

4
2 Press the Automatic High Beam switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

224

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on: Vehicle speed is above approximately 34 km/h (21 mph). The area ahead of the vehicle is dark. There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights
turned on. There are few streetlights on the road ahead. If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off: Vehicle speed drops below approximately 27 km/h (17 mph). The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark. Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on. There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
Turning the high beam on/off manually
Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off. Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

Switching to high beam
Press the Automatic High Beam switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on. Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

225

The Automatic High Beam can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

Camera sensor detection information

High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

· When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve · When the vehicle is cut in front of by another · When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated
curves, road dividers or roadside trees High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without
using the headlights is detected.

House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to turn off.

The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or off:

· The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding

vehicles

· The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles

· When a oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side

· When a oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle

· The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

· The number of passengers and amount of luggage

High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.

In the situations below, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system.

· The system is not able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness levels, and flashes or exposes nearby pedestrians to the high beam.
· In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.) · The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc. · The windshield is cracked or damaged. · The camera sensor is deformed or dirty. · The camera sensor temperature is extremely high. · Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights. · Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, are
changing color, or are not aimed properly. · When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness. · When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with
rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks, etc.). · When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road. · There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror. · The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck. · The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty. · The vehicle is listing or titling, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc. · The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other
drivers or pedestrians nearby.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

226

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

WARNING
Limitations of the Automatic High Beam Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.

NOTICE
Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.
Do not touch the camera sensor. Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong
impact. Do not disassemble the camera sensor. Do not spill liquids onto the camera sensor. Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the
camera sensor or the area of windshield near the camera sensor. Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc. Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the camera sensor. Do not overload the vehicle. Do not modify the vehicle. Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield. Contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Fog light switch

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

227

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

Operating instructions

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

Fog lights can be used when The headlights are on in low beam.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

228 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster (if equipped)

Type A

Off

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
6 Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the headlights are on and the lever is pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.
Type B

Off

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

229
4

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
6 Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

230 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

Type A

Off

Rain-sensing operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

When "AUTO" is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

231

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when "AUTO" is selected. 6 Increases the sensitivity 7 Decreases the sensitivity

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

The wipers will automatically operate

a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

Vehicles with headlight cleaners:

When the headlights are on and the

lever is pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this,

the headlight cleaners will operate

every 5th time the lever is pulled.

Type B

Off

Rain-sensing operation

Low speed operation

High speed operation

Temporary operation

When "AUTO" is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

232

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when "AUTO" is selected. 6 Increases the sensitivity 7 Decreases the sensitivity

8 Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the headlights are on and the lever is pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.
The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode.
Dripping prevention wiper sweep (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, this function will not operate while driving.
Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) Vehicle speed affects the Intermittent wiper interval.
Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers) The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs, etc. are present on the windshield.
If the wiper switch is turned to the "AUTO" position while the power switch is in ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or 5F (-15C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers 233
If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked, if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid tank. WARNING
Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with rainsensing windshield wipers) The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers, etc. do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE 4
When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

234 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer

Operating the wiper lever

Turning the end of the lever turns on the rear window wiper and washer.

Type A

Off

Intermittent operation

Normal operation

4 Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Type B

Off

Intermittent operation

Normal operation

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

235

Driving

4
4 Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when The power switch is in ON mode. NOTICE
When the rear window is dry Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

236 4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off. Confirm the type of fuel.
Fuel types Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher) WARNING
When refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling. Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury. Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank. Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank: Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not top off the fuel tank.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-4. Refueling 237
NOTICE Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally, damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1 With the doors unlocked, press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.
Push inward and take your hand away to slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open the door fully by hand.
4
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and put it into the holder on the fuel filler door.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

238 4-4. Refueling
When the fuel filler door cannot be opened Remove the cover inside the luggage compartment by inserting a screwdriver. After removing the cover, pull the lever to unlock the fuel filler door and it will be ready to open as usual. When removing the cover, to prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Closing the fuel tank cap
1 After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.
2 Close the fuel filler door, and press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler door will lock also.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-4. Refueling 239
Fuel filler door lock condition The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle's doors are locked in the following conditions: When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle When the automatic door locking system is operated (P. 127) When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle's doors are locked WARNING
When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. 4
NX300h_U_OM78007U

240 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Summary of functions
Without accelerator pedal operation by the driver, in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates and decelerates in accordance to the changes in speed of the preceding vehicle. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed. Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (P. 241) Constant speed control mode (P. 246) 1 Indicators 2 Display 3 Set speed 4 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button 5 Cruise control switch

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Driving

4
1 Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
2 Example of deceleration cruising When a preceding vehicle is driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
3 Example of follow-up cruising When following a preceding vehicle is driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
4 Example of acceleration When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1 Press the "ON/OFF" button to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (above approximately 30 mph [50 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.
Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.
1 Increases the speed 2 Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased

or decreased as follows:

· When the set speed is shown in "MPH"

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is

operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held · When the set speed is shown in "km/h"

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (P. 246), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Type A

1 Long

Preceding vehicle mark

2 Medium 3 Short

Type B

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned to ON mode. If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options Long
Medium Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Approximately 160 ft. (50 m) Approximately 130 ft. (40 m) Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

Canceling and resuming the speed control
1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.
2 Pushing the lever up resumes the speed control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, cruise control does not resume when the actual vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. Also, when the vehicle is in constant speed control mode and the actual vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, cruise control does not resume as the set speed is cleared.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a

vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic

deceleration via the cruise control is

not possible, the display will flash and

the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

An example of this would be if another

driver cuts in front of you while you are

following a vehicle. Depress the brake

pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-

to-vehicle distance.

Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:

When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed Immediately after the cruise control speed was set When depressing the accelerator pedal

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt, etc.
1 Press the "ON/OFF" button to activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
2 Switch to constant speed control mode. (Push the lever forward and hold for approximately 1 second.)
Cruise control indicator will come on. When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second. After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. If the power switch is turned off and then turned to ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Adjusting the speed setting: P. 243 Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 245

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations. "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable" will be displayed on the multi-information display:

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no vehicles ahead.

The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed below 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly detect the vehicle.

VSC is activated.

TRAC is activated for a period of time.

When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set to the "AUTO" mode or the high speed wiper operation position).

Pre-collision braking is activated.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

VSC is activated.

TRAC is activated for a period of time.

When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

Pre-collision braking is activated.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
1 Grille cover 2 Radar sensor

Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
Certification for the radar sensor For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR007 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

WARNING

Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.

Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Assisting the driver to measure following distance The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is appro-

priate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is

absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not

there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the "ON/OFF" button when not in use.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

250 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc. In heavy traffic On roads with sharp bends On winding roads On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow On sharp inclines or declines
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. Roads with continuous inclines and declines At entrances to freeways and highways When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from
detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.) When an approach warning buzzer is heard often When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (P. 245) will not be activated, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicles that cut in suddenly Vehicles traveling at low speeds Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of
the sensor
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

251

WARNING

When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly Operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal operation depending on the situation) as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

When the road curves or when the lanes are

narrow

Accelerate Accelerate Decelerate When steering wheel operation or your posi-
tion in the lane is unstable

When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the dynamic radar cruise control can function effectively. Otherwise, the radar sensor may not detect correctly and could result in an accident. Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. Do not disassemble the sensor. Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover. Do not replace them with non-genuine parts. If the radar sensor needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

Dynamic radar cruise controlwith full-speed range

Summary of functions

Without accelerator pedal operation by the driver, in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops in accordance to the changes in speed of the preceding vehicle. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (P. 254) Constant speed control mode (P. 260)

1 Indicators

2 Display

3 Set speed

4 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button

5 Cruise control switch

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

1 Example of constant speed cruising When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
2 Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising When a preceding vehicle is driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead. When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.
3 Example of acceleration When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (above

approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])

and push the lever down to set the

speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. While the vehicle is in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, if the lever is released when vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (50 km/h) and a vehicle ahead can be detected, the vehicle will start following the vehicle ahead at a set speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.
1 Increases the speed
(Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
· When the set speed is shown in "MPH"
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held · When the set speed is shown in "km/h"
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 260), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the button changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Type A

1 Long

Preceding vehicle mark

2 Medium

3 Short

Type B

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the power switch is turned to ON mode. If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown corre- 4 spond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance will be about 10 ft. (3 m) to 16 ft. (5 m) regardless of the vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting.

Distance options Long
Medium Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Approximately 160 ft. (50 m) Approximately 130 ft. (40 m) Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

258 4-5. Using the driving support systems Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, push the lever up. Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed. (When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)
2 Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.
However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, cruise control does not resume when the actual vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. Also, when the vehicle is in constant speed control mode and the actual vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, cruise control does not resume as the set speed is cleared.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicleto-vehicle distance.

Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:

When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

When depressing the accelerator pedal

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

260 4-5. Using the driving support systems Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt, etc. 1 Press the "ON/OFF" button to acti-
vate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
2 Switch to constant speed control mode. (Push the lever forward and hold for approximately 1 second.)
Cruise control indicator will come on. When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second. After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. If the power switch is turned off and then turned to ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Adjusting the speed setting: P. 256 Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 258
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

261

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations. "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable" will be displayed on the multi-information display:

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no vehicles ahead.

The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed below 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly detect the vehicle.

VSC is activated.

TRAC is activated for a period of time.

When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set to the "AUTO" mode or the high speed wiper operation position).

The parking brake is operated.

The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.

Pre-collision braking is activated.

The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:

· The driver is not wearing a seat belt. · The driver's door is opened. · The back door or hood is opened. If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations: Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed. Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). VSC is activated. TRAC is activated for a period of time. When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch. Pre-collision braking is activated.
Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
1 Grille cover 2 Radar sensor

Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
Certification for the radar sensor P. 248

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

WARNING

Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Assisting the driver to measure following distance The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.

Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine

whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range off using the "ON/OFF" button when not in use.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc. In heavy traffic On roads with sharp bends On winding roads On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow On sharp inclines or declines Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. Roads with continuous inclines and declines At entrances to freeways and highways When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.) When an approach warning buzzer is heard often When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (P. 259) will not be activated, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicles that cut in suddenly Vehicles traveling at low speeds Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

Motorcycles traveling in the same lane When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of
the sensor

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems WARNING When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

265

When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

Accelerate Accelerate Decelerate When steering wheel operation or your posi-
tion in the lane is unstable

When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can function effectively. Otherwise, the radar sensor may not detect correctly and could result in an accident. Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. Do not disassemble the sensor. Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover. Do not replace them with non-genuine parts. If the radar sensor needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

Cruise control

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without operating the accelerator pedal. Use the cruise control on freeways and highways. 1 Indicators 2 Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed
1 Press the "ON/OFF" button to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (above approximately 25 mph [40 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.
Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

4
: If equipped

NX300h_U_OM78007U

268 4-5. Using the driving support systems Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained. 1 Increases the speed 2 Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.
2 Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.
However, resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

Cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can be accelerated by operating accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes.

Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

Automatic cancelation of cruise control

Cruise control is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.

Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed.

Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40km/h).

VSC is activated.

TRAC is activated for a period of time. When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.

If "Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display

Press the "ON/OFF" button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the "ON/OFF" button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc. In heavy traffic On roads with sharp bends On winding roads On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow On sharp inclines or declines Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

NX300h_U_OM78007U

270 4-5. Using the driving support systems
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
Summary of function
While driving on a highway or freeway that has white (or yellow) lane markers and few curves, a camera, which is located on the upper part of the windshield, uses this system to recognize the white (yellow) lane markers and when the driver has deviated from the lane. If the system judges that the vehicle has deviated from the current traffic lane, along with alerting the driver with a buzzer and indications in the multi-information display, it will provide assistance by operating the steering wheel to avoid further deviation from the marker lines. Lane recognition camera
1 Indicators 2 Display 3 LDA switch

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

Functions included with LDA Lane deviation alert function

Alert buzzer

When the system judges that the vehicle is deviating from the current traffic lane, an alert buzzer sounds and it prompts cautions from the display screen of the multi-information display.
4 When the alert buzzer sounds, please check the surrounding road situation and return near the center of the white (yellow) lane markers by safely operating the steering wheel.
Steering control function
Alert buzzer
In steering control
If the system judges that the vehicle has deviated from the current traffic lane, it is displayed in the multi-information display and steering force is supplied to the steering wheel by the steering control, providing required assistance in steering wheel operation to avoid further deviation from the marker lines.
In order to prevent over relying on the system, when the system does not operate the steering wheel and driving where hands are lightly supporting the steering wheel continues, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Turning the LDA on
Press the LDA switch to activate the LDA.
LDA indicator will come on and lane lines will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the switch again to deactivate the LDA. When the power switch is turned off, the LDA returns to off.

Type A

Type B

Operating conditions for each function
Lane deviation alert function
When the following conditions are satisfied, the function operates.
When the lane deviation alert function operates, lane lines is displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 274) When the LDA is on. (P. 272) When the vehicle speed is approximately32 mph (50 km/h) or more. When the system recognizes white (yellow) lane markers. When the lane width is more than approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m). When turn signal lever is not operating. When the emergency flashers are not operating. When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more
than approximately 328 ft. (100 m) When a system abnormality is not detected. (P. 275)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems

273

Steering control function
In addition to the operation conditions for the lane deviation alert function, when all of the following conditions are fulfilled, it operates. When settings for the "Steering Assist" in the "Settings display" of the multi-
information display is set to "On" (P. 276) When the vehicle has not slowed down more than a defined setting. When the steering wheel is operated with a steering force level that is not
equivalent to changing lanes. When the ABS, VSC, TRAC, or PCS (if equipped) is not operating. When intentional accelerator pedal operations are not performed.

Temporary cancelation of the functions
Lane deviation alert function
In any of the following cases, the lane deviation alert function will be temporarily canceled. When the conditions, in which the cancelation occurred 4 improves, the function will resume operations. The vehicle speed deviates from the operating ranges of the function The turn signal lever is operated When the emergency flashers are operated When the lane markers cannot be recognized while driving When the system malfunctions Immediately after the lane deviation alert operates
The lane deviation alert function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again. When more than half of the vehicle body straddles the lane
Steering control function
In addition to the temporary cancelation conditions of the lane deviation alert function, in any of the following cases the steering control function is temporarily canceled. When the conditions for which the cancelation occurred improves, the function will restart operations. When the vehicle has slowed down more than a defined setting. When the steering wheel is operated with a steering force level that is
equivalent to changing lanes. When the ABS, VSC, TRAC, or PCS (if equipped) is operating. When intentional accelerator pedal operations are performed. Operations of the VSC and TRAC have been turned off (P. 307)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the steering control function was canceled
When it is judged that there is a malfunction in the system relating to steering control function, the steering control function is canceled and "LDA Steering Assist Deactivated Warnings Available" is displayed on the multi-information display. However, it is possible that the lane deviation alert function operates. When the steering control function is canceled, it will not return unless "Steering Assist" is turned "On" again from the "Settings display" of the multi-information display (P. 276) or the LDA switch is turned on again.
Indication on the multi-information display
When the both lane lines turn white: Indicates that both right and left lane markers are recognized.
If the vehicle deviates from the traffic lane, the lane display on the side the vehicle has deviated from will flash in orange. (P. 271)

When the either lane line turns white:
Indicates that the lane marker on the white-marked side is recognized.
If the vehicle deviates from the side of a lane with recognized lane markers, the lane line will flash in orange. (P. 271)

When the inside of both lane lines are
black:
Indicates that no lane markers are recognized or the LDA is temporarily canceled.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

Display while in steering control
In steering control, the steering control indicator will come on.

Driving

If "Lane Departure Alert Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display

Even if the LDA switch is pressed, when the LDA indicator does not come on the system may have a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

The steering control function There are cases where it may be difficult to sense the steering force on the steering

wheel by the steering control, according to speed, the deviation situation, conditions of a

road, etc.

Alert buzzer for lane deviation alert

Depending on the audio system sound level or air conditioning fan noise while the audio system or air conditioning system is in use, it may be difficult to hear the alert buzzer.

After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LDA may not be available and a warning message will be displayed for a while after driving has started. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the lane recognition camera (P. 270) becomes suitable for its operation, turn the LDA switch on again after a short time.

If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle

The lane deviation alert will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not be recognized.

Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following situations, the lane recognition camera may be unable to recognize lane markers causing the lane deviation alert function to operate incorrectly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow covers the lane markers

When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a toll booth, a crossing or before a ticket checkpoint

When the lane markers are broken, Botts' dots (raised pavement markers) or stones

When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.

When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water, etc.

When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the lane markers are on a curb, etc. When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to
or exit from a tunnel When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the cam-
era lens When driving on roads that are branching or merging When driving on a hill When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven When driving on rough or unpaved roads When driving on a sharp curve When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper
tire inflation pressure When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely
short When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an
extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when
the headlights are misaligned When receiving a side wind When changing the tires Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable. Warning messages for the LDA Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. Also, even if a warning message is displayed, it will not impede normal driving. When turning on/off the steering control function

From

"Settings display" (P. 103) of the multi-information display, the steering

control function can be turned on/off.

1 Pressing the or meter control switches (P. 103), selects

2 With each press of meter control switches, the control switches between "On" and "Off"

Sensitivity adjustment for the lane deviation alert buzzer

From

"Settings display" (P. 103) of the multi-information display, the alert sen-

sitivity for the alert buzzer when deviating from the lane can be adjusted.

1 Pressing the or meter control switches (P. 103), selects

2 With each press of meter control switches, the control switches between "High" and "Standard"

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

277

WARNING

Before using the LDA

Do not over rely on the LDA. The LDA does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely. Also, take occasional rests from fatigue due to driving over long periods of time, etc. Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident.

Do not drive without holding the steering wheel

While the steering control function is operating, when the system judges that the vehicle is being driven without holding the steering wheel, a warning message is displayed. (P. 271) Inappropriate steering wheel operations and/or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident. When driving, firmly hold the steering wheel and keep safe driving in mind.

To avoid operating the LDA by mistake

Switch the LDA off using the LDA switch when not in use. (P. 272) Situations unsuitable for LDA

Do not use the LDA in any of the following situations. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.

When driving with snow tires, tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment

When a tire with a different structure, maker, brand, or tread pattern is used.

When remain tread of the tire or the air pressure is insufficient

When restructuring the suspension

When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinterpreted as lane markers (such as guardrails, a curb, reflector posts, etc.)

When driving on snowy roads

When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, sand, dust, etc.

When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains of old lane markers are still visible on the road

When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving in a temporary lane

When driving on road surfaces that are slippery from rain, snow, etc.

When driving in traffic lanes other than highways and freeway

When driving through construction areas

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE
To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights. Do not modify the suspension or replace it with non-genuine parts. Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.). If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not overload with luggage
Lane recognition camera Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly Keep the windshield clean at all times. Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield.
Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the lane recognition camera.

Do not spill liquids onto the lane recognition camera. Do not attach window tinting to the windshield. Do not install an antenna in front of the lane recognition camera. If the windshield area in front of the lane recognition camera is fogged up, use the
windshield defogger to remove the fog from that area. (P. 435) When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images. Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty. When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass cleaner, etc., on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not change the installation position or direction of the lane recognition camera or remove it. The direction of the lane recognition camera is precisely adjusted. Do not subject the lane recognition camera to strong impact or force, and do not disassemble the lane recognition camera. Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield. Contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

279

Intuitive parking assist

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the displays and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors
1 Front corner sensors 2 Front center sensors 3 Rear corner sensors 4 Rear center sensors
4

Intuitive parking assist switch
Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off
When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

280 4-5. Using the driving support systems Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, the following displays inform the driver of the position and distance to the obstacle. Multi-information display
1 Front corner sensor operation 2 Front center sensor operation 3 Rear corner sensor operation 4 Rear center sensor operation
Lexus Display Audio or navigation system screen 1 Intuitive parking assist display
When the Lexus parking assist monitor is not displayed. A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (P. 283)
: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.
2 Insert display
When the Lexus parking assist monitor is displayed. A simplified image is displayed on the right upper corner of the Lexus Display Audio and the navigation system screen when an obstacle is detected.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
Distance display Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.

Display*1

Insert display

Approximate distance to obstacle

Front and rear center sensor

Front and rear corner sensor

Front center sensor:

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to

2.0 ft. (60 cm) Rear center sensor:

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to

(continuous) (blinking slowly) 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

Front center sensor: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Rear center sensor: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to (blinking rapidly) 1.2 ft. (35 cm)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking*2 or continuous*3)

(continuous)

Front center sensor: Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Rear center sensor: Less than 1.2 ft. (35 cm)

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

*1: The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations. (P. 280) *2: Multi-information display *3: Lexus Display Audio or navigation system screen

NX300h_U_OM78007U

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously. · Front corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) · Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) · Rear corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) · Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm)
When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.

Detection range of the sensors
1 Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) 2 Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) 3 Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

Setting up intuitive parking assist (vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio or navigation system)

You can change the buzzer sounds volume and the screen operating conditions when the power switch is in ON mode.

Lexus Display Audio system

1 Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then select "Setup" on the screen.

2 Select "Vehicle", and then select "LEXUS Park Assist" on the screen.

3 Select the desired item.

Navigation system

1 Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, and then select "Setup" on the screen.

2 Select "Vehicle", and then select "LEXUS Park Assist" on the screen.

3 Select the desired item.

Lexus Display Audio screen

Navigation system screen

1 The buzzer sounds volume can be adjusted. 2 On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display. 3 Both the front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The intuitive parking assist can be operated when Front corner sensors: · The power switch is in ON mode. · The shift lever is in other than P. · The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). (At any speed when the shift lever is in R) Front center sensors: · The power switch is in ON mode. · The shift lever is in other than P or R. · The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). Rear corner and rear center sensors: · The power switch is in ON mode. · The shift lever is in R.
Intuitive parking assist display When an obstacle is detected while the Lexus parking assist monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper corner of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.
Sensor detection information The sensor's detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle's bumper. Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. · There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.) · The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected. · The sensor is covered in any way. · The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. · On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. · The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. · There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. · The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. · The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. · Towing eyelets are installed. · The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. · The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. · In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather. · The area directly under the bumpers is not detected. · If obstacles draw too close to the sensor. · A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed. · People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing. In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems 285

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:

· Wires, fences, ropes, etc. · Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves · Sharply-angled objects · Low obstacles · Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehi-
cle The following situations may occur during use.

· Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
· Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor. · There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor's detection areas before the display is shown and the buzzer sounds. · Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once. · It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.

If "Clean Parking Assist Sensor" is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the sensor, the system should return to normal.

Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction display may appear or an obstacle may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out, the system should return to normal.

If "Parking Assist Malfunction" is displayed on the multi-information display

Depending on the malfunction of the sensor, the device may not be working normally. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

Customization

Settings (e.g. buzzer sounds volume) can be changed. (P. 283)

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

286 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or
reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle's speed. Do not install accessories within the sensors' detection areas.
NOTICE When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds when no
obstacles are detected. If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact. If the bumper collides with something. If the display shows continuously without beeping, except when the buzzer mute
switch has been turned on. If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning. Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

287

Lexus parking assist monitor

The parking assist monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

The rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in R and the power switch is in ON mode.

The parking assist monitor system will

be deactivated when the shift lever is in any position other than R.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

288 4-5. Using the driving support systems Using the Lexus parking assist monitor
Screen display The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift position is shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode. A Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen.
Using the system Use any of the following modes.
Estimated course line display mode (P. 290) Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Parking assist guide line display mode (P. 292) The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.

289

Distance guide line display mode Distance guide lines only are displayed.
4
Switching the display mode
When the shift lever is in any position other than R, the display mode can be changed in the following procedure. 1 Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, and then
select "Setup" on the screen. 2 Select "Vehicle", and then select "Back Camera Guide Line Setting" on the
screen. 3 Select the desired display mode.
1 Estimated course line display mode (P. 290)
2 Parking assist guide line display mode (P. 292)
3 Distance guide line display mode Distance guide lines only are displayed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

290 4-5. Using the driving support systems Estimated course line display mode
Screen description
1 Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
2 Vehicle width guide line
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width. The line aligns with the estimated course lines when the steering wheel is straight.
3 Estimated course lines
The lines show an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
4 Distance guide line
The line moves, together with the estimated course lines, in sync with the steering wheel. The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper.
5 Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1 Shift the shift lever to R.
2 Turn the steering wheel so that the estimated course lines are within the parking space, and back up slowly.
1 Parking space
2 Estimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the vehicle has entered the parking space, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle width guide lines are within the left and right dividing lines of the parking space.
3 Vehicle width guide line

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

Parking assist guide line display mode
Screen description

1 Vehicle width guide lines These lines indicate a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
2 Parking assist guide lines These lines indicate the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle. These lines also indicate the approximate position of the steering wheel when parking.
3 Distance guide line This line (red) indicates points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind the rear bumper of your vehicle.
4 Vehicle center guide line The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

Parking operation
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1 Shift the shift lever to R.
2 Back up until the parking assist guide line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.
1 Parking assist guide line
2 Parking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.
4 Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus parking assist monitor precautions

Area displayed on screen

The parking assist monitor displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

The image of the Lexus parking

assist monitor can be adjusted.

(P. 352)

· The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle orien-

tation conditions.

· Objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be seen on the

screen.

· The camera uses a special lens. The

distance of the image that appears

on the screen differs from the actual

distance. · Items which are located higher than

Corners of bumper

the camera may not be displayed on

the monitor.

· If your vehicle is equipped with a backlit license plate, it may interfere with the dis-

play.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus parking assist monitor camera The camera for the parking assist monitor is located above the license plate.

295

Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering 4 to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water. After that, rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it clean with a soft and wet cloth.
Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.

A margin of error

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The estimated course lines target a flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It

is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as

vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When

approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the

flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

Estimated course lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown in the illustration, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it will hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated course lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

298 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Distance guidelines Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point 2 . However, in reality if you back up to point 1 , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that 1 is closest and 3 is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to 1 and 3 is the same and 2 is farther than 1 and 3 .
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

Things you should know
If you notice any symptoms If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Likely cause

Solution

The image is difficult to see

· The vehicle is in a dark area

· The temperature around the lens is

either high or low · The outside temperature is low · There are water droplets on the cam-
era · It is raining or humid · Foreign matter (mud, etc.) is adhering
to the camera · There are scratches on the camera · Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) The image on the Lexus parking assist monitor system screen can be adjusted. (P. 352)

· The vehicle is under fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mercury lights etc.

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera.

Flush the camera with a large quantity of water. After that, rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it clean with a soft and wet cloth.

The image is out of alignment

The camera or surrounding area has Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

received a strong impact.

dealer.

The guide lines are very far out of alignment

The camera position is out of alignment.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

· The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy If this happens due to these causes, it

load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low does not indicate a malfunction.

due to a tire puncture, etc.)

Back up while visually checking the vehi-

· The vehicle is used on an incline.

cle's surroundings.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

300 4-5. Using the driving support systems

Likely cause

Solution

The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in the signals being Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

output by the steering sensor.

dealer.

Guide lines are not displayed

The back door is open.

Close the back door. If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course lines are not displayed

· The steering wheel has been moved while the battery was being reinstalled.
· Battery power is low. · The steering sensor has been rein-
stalled. · There is a malfunction in the signals
being output by the steering sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering wheel as far as it will go to the left and right. If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

WARNING

When using the Lexus parking assist monitor system

The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles, people or mount the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

The instructions given are only guidelines.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic condi-

tions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the parking assist system.

When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

Do not use the parking assist monitor in the following cases:

· On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow · When using tire chains or emergency tires · When the back door is not closed completely · On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes. In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle before proceeding.

If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (P. 295)

Estimated course line display mode: If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

302 4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE How to use the camera
The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases. · If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. · As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. · When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water, rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Failure to do so may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image. · Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. · If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. · When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. · When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems 303
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.
4
1 Normal mode For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco drive mode or sport mode.
2 Eco drive mode Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, "ECO" indicator will be shown on the multi-information display.
3 Sport mode Assists acceleration response by controlling the hybrid system and steering. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driving on mountain roads.
When not in sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, "SPORT" indicator will be shown on the multi-information display and the hybrid system indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 97)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

304 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
Sport mode automatic deactivation Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving in sport mode.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems 305
Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake System)

The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the

brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

Hill-start assist control

Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an incline.

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

NX300h_U_OM78007U

306 4-5. Using the driving support systems E-Four (if equipped)
Electronic On-Demand AWD system. Automatically switches from frontwheel drive to all-wheel drive (AWD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 310
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
P. 316
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems 307 Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce

power from the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing

to turn the system

off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly

press and release

The "Traction Control Turned Off" will be shown on the multi-informa-

tion display. Press

again to

turn the system back on.

Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold while the vehicle is stopped.

for more than 3 seconds

The VSC OFF indicator will come on and the "Traction Control Turned Off" will be
shown on the multi-information display.*

Press

again to turn the systems back on.

*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision
braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and the message will
be shown on the multi-information display. (P. 313)

When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC

has been disabled even if the

has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer. Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC and hill-start assist
control systems Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

308 4-5. Using the driving support systems
ECB operating sound ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred. Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated. Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver's door is opened. Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when 1 or 2 minutes passed after the stop of the hybrid system.
EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations: When the power switch is turned off If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
Operating conditions of hill-start assist control When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate: The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline). The vehicle is stopped. The accelerator pedal is not depressed. The parking brake is not engaged.
Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations: The shift lever is moved to P or N. The accelerator pedal is depressed. The parking brake is engaged. Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems 309

WARNING

The ABS does not operate effectively when

The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick road.

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

When driving with tire chains

When driving over bumps in the road

When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road

surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when

Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

When the TRAC, VSC and/or ABS are activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

When the TRAC/VSC system are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, brakes are automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage. The alert timing for the pre-collision system can be changed or turned ON/ OFF, as necessary, by operating the switch. (P. 311)
Pre-collision warning
When a high possibility of a frontal collision is detected, a buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the driver using warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

311

Changing the pre-collision system
Changing the alert timing of the pre-collision system
Each time the PCS switch is pressed, the response to the distance changes as follows.
1 Far
2 Middle*
3 Near
*: Default setting

Turning off the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or more seconds.

The PCS warning light turns on and a message is shown on the multi-information display. To turn on the system, press the PCS switch again. The system is set to ON each time the power switch is turned to ON mode.

Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The pre-collision system is operational when The pre-collision system is on (P. 311) and the following conditions are met: Pre-collision warning: · Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h). · The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 7 mph (10 km/h). Pre-collision brake assist: · The VSC is not turned off. · Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). · The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h). · The brake pedal is depressed. Pre-collision braking: · The VSC is not turned off. · Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h). · The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 7 mph (10 km/h).
Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of a collision If the following obstructs the front of the sensor, the system judges that a collision may be possible and operates. When passing by a vehicle while making left or right turns or passing a vehicle in an opposite lane. When the vehicle rapidly approaches an object in front of it (such as another vehicle, toll gate, etc.) When climbing a steep hill, etc., and there are structures in the upper region of the road (billboards, low ceilings, street lamps, etc.) When driving through narrow passages or places with low ceilings (bridges, tunnels, overhead passes, etc.) When driving on an uneven road surface When metal objects are on the road surface causing level differences or protrusions in the road When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs When the radar sensor moves off position due to its surrounding area being subjected to a strong impact. When there is an obstacle on the side of an entrance of a curb for road (guardrails, etc.) When your vehicle is tilted upwards (due to towing a trailer or during emergency towing, heavy loads in the luggage compartment, etc.). When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal.
Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-5. Using the driving support systems

313

Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following: On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs When the radar sensor moves off position due to its surrounding area being subjected to a strong impact Due to greatly turning the wheel when an obstacle suddenly appears ahead
Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc., that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
When there is a malfunction in the system, or if the system is temporarily unavailable The PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is shown on the multi-information 4 display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
When the TRAC and VSC are turned off When the TRAC and VSC operations are turned off (P. 307), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking are also turned off. However, the alert function operates. The PCS warning light turns on and the "VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable" is shown on the multi-information display.
Certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQDNMWR007 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio frequency radiation exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For vehicles sold in Canada This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
Limitations of the pre-collision system It is the driver's responsibility to drive safely. The driver should be aware of the surroundings and strive for safe driving. Do not rely on the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations. This system does not avoid or reduce collisions in every situation. Overly relying on the system and entrusting it with safety may cause an unexpected accident which could lead to death or serious injury. Although the system is designed for the purpose to support in evading collisions or reducing the damage of a collision, the effect changes according to various conditions. (P. 312) Therefore, it does not always provide the same performance. Also, the precollision braking does not work depending on the operating conditions of the driver. When the driver has stepped on the brake pedal and is operating the steering wheel, the system judges that the driver is taking evasive action and the automatic braking may not operate.
Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident. Keep the sensor and front grille cover clean at all times. Clean the sensor and front grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may not normally or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer. Do not disassemble the sensor. Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area. Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover. If the radar sensor needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

315

WARNING
Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points. Assisting the driver in watching the road The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings. Assisting the driver in making correct judgement When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation. Assisting the driver in taking action The pre-collision system's braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the sever- 4 ity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself, without the proper operations of the driver, is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions; The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up These functions use the same sensors.

1 BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switch's indicator illuminates and the buzzer sounds. This switch is for both Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
2 BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
Blind Spot Monitor function: When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a vehicle is in the blind spot, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicator flashes. Rear Cross Traffic Alert function: When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
3 Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the right-hand rear seat.
: If equipped
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

317

The BSM outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

When "Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable" is shown on the multi-information display

Water, snow mud, etc., may be built up in the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper. (P. 318) Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area bumper should return it to normal. Also, the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold weather.

When "Blind Spot Monitor System Malfunction" is shown on the multi-information display

There may be a sensor malfunction or voltage abnormality. Have the vehicle inspected at a Lexus dealer.

Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25 GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

318

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING
Handling the radar sensor One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly. Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the sensor. Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper. Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper. Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

319

The Blind Spot Monitor function
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the BSM outside rear view mirror indicator.

The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of the detection area extends to:

1 Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of

the vehicle is not in the detection area

2 Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the

rear bumper

3 Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the system The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

320 4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when The BSM main switch is set to on Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle. Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* Following vehicles that are in the same lane* Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle* *: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions: · During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc. · When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper · When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water, etc. · When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area · When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates · When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc. · When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle · When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle · When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle · When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area · Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions: · When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. · When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle · When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area · When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

321

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function operates when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle's existence through flashing the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

1 Approaching vehicles

2 Detection areas

WARNING

Cautions regarding the use of the system The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver's own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles, etc., before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

322

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:

Approaching vehicle
Fast Slow

Speed
18 mph (28 km/h) 5 mph (8 km/h)

1 Approximate alert distance 65 ft. (20 m) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when The BSM main switch is set to on. The shift lever is in R. Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).
Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
Vehicles approaching from directly behind
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle* Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle* *: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-5. Using the driving support systems

323

Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions: During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc. When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper When multiple vehicles approach continuously Shallow angle parking When a vehicle is approaching at high speed When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc. Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on Directly after the hybrid system is started with the BSM main switch on
Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

324 4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:
Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (P. 303)
Use of Hybrid System Indicator
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicator needle of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. (P. 100)
Shift lever operation
Shift the shift lever to D when stopped at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traffic, etc. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. When using the N, there is no positive effect on fuel consumption. In the N, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. Also, when using the air conditioning system, etc., the hybrid battery (traction battery) power is consumed.
Accelerator pedal/brake pedal operation
Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor fuel consumption. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.
When braking
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in a timely manner. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-6. Driving tips 325
Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel economy. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When driving in a traffic jam, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
Highway driving
Control and maintain the vehicle at a constant speed. Before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be regenerated when slowing down.
Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help reduce 4 excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: When the ambient temperature is high, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning system and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until it and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel economy. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel economy. Use tires that are appropriate for the season.
Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage will lead to poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack will also cause poor fuel economy.
Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to excess fuel consumption.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

326 4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. · Engine oil · Engine/power control unit coolant · Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery. Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for
the front tires*.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 225/60R18 tires. Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions: Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes. Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-6. Driving tips

327

When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P and block the wheel under the vehicle without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.
When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting the shift lever to P. (P. 213)
If the vehicle is left parked with the brakes damp in cold temperatures, there is a possibility of the brakes freezing.
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regu- 4 lated for each tire size. Vehicles with 225/65R17 tires Side chain: 1 3 mm (0.12 in.) in diameter 2 10 mm (0.39 in.) in width 3 25 mm (0.98 in.) in length Cross chain: 4 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter 5 14 mm (0.55 in.) in width 6 25 mm (0.98 in.) in length Vehicles with 225/60R18 tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted on the 225/60R18 tires. Snow tires should be use instead.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

328 4-6. Driving tips
Tire chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires. Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains. WARNING
Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. Use tires of the specified size. Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
Driving with tire chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped).
When parking the vehicle When parking the vehicle without applying the parking brake, make sure to chock the wheels. If you do not chock the wheels, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, possibly resulting in an accident.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-6. Driving tips 329
NOTICE Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
4
NX300h_U_OM78007U

330 4-6. Driving tips
Utility vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity.
Utility vehicle feature
Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
WARNING Utility vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious injury or damage to your vehicle: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten their seat belts. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped) will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly. Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control. Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

4-6. Driving tips

331

Off-road driving

Your vehicle is not designed to be driven off-road. However, in the event that

off-road driving cannot be avoided, please observe the following precautions to

help avoid the areas prohibited to vehicles.

Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.

Respect private property. Get owner's permission before entering private property.

Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

AWD models: Avoid driving on very steep, slippery roads and other surfaces,

such as sand, where the tires are liable to lose traction. Your vehicle may not

perform as well as conventional AWD on-road vehicles on these surfaces.

Additional information for off-road driving For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico: To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations. State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments State Motor Vehicle Bureau Recreational Vehicle Clubs U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

Driving

NX300h_U_OM78007U

332 4-6. Driving tips
WARNING
Off-road driving precautions Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious injury or damage to your vehicle: Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places. Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim. Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow. After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped to the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur. When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
To prevent water damage Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the hybrid battery (traction battery), hybrid system or other components does not occur. Water entering the engine compartment may cause severe damage to the hybrid system. Water entering the interior may cause the hybrid battery stowed under the rear seats to short circuit. Water entering the hybrid transmission and rear electric motor (traction motor) will cause deterioration in transmission quality. The malfunction indicator may come on, and the vehicle may not be drivable. Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the hybrid transmission case, reducing the gear oil's lubricating qualities.
When you drive through water If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.
Inspection after off-road driving Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Driving

4-6. Driving tips 333
4
NX300h_U_OM78007U

334

5-1. Basic Operations Lexus Display Audio System .........................................336 Steering wheel audio switches ...................................... 342 Mobile Assistant........................343 USB/AUX ports ........................345
5-2. Setup Setup menu.................................. 347 General settings ........................348 Voice settings............................... 351 Display settings .......................... 352
5-3. Using the audio system Selecting the audio source ..........................................353 Optimal use of the audio system .........................................354 Audio settings.............................355 Audio menu screen operation ...................................358
5-4. Using the radio Radio operation............................361
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation ................ 367

NX300h_U_OM78007U

335

Lexus Display Audio system

5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod ....................374
Using USB memory device .......................................... 377
Using the AUX port..................381
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® Steps for using Bluetooth® devices........................................ 382 Registering a Bluetooth® device ......................................... 384 Selecting a Bluetooth® device ......................................... 385 Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player ............................. 386 Connecting a Bluetooth® phone...........................................387 Displaying a Bluetooth® device details........................... 388 Detailed Bluetooth® settings....................................... 389
5-8. Bluetooth® Audio Listening to Bluetooth® Audio........................................... 390

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone Using a Bluetooth® Phone ........................................... 392
Making a call ...............................394
Receiving a call .......................... 397
Speaking on the phone...........398 Using a Bluetooth®
phone message...................... 400
Using the steering wheel switches......................................402
Bluetooth® phone settings........................................403
5-10. Phonebook
Contact settings .........................405
Messaging setting.................... 408 5-11. Bluetooth®
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)....................409 Bluetooth® ................................... 413
5-12. Other function
"Information" screen.................. 418
USB photo ...................................420
Weather information................ 422
Voice command system ......... 423
LEXUS Enform Remote..........427

NX300h_U_OM78007U

336 5-1. Basic Operations
Lexus Display Audio system
Use the following buttons to start listening to the audio system.
Lexus Display Audio operation buttons

1 Disc slot
2 "TUNE·SCROLL" knob Select a radio station band, track or file.
3 Except radio and A/V mode: Pause or resume playing a track or file. Radio and A/V mode: Turn mute on/off.
4 Select preset radio stations, or access a desired track or file.
5 Display the media top screen.
6 Display the radio top screen.
7 Eject a disc.
8 "PWR·VOL" knob Press to turn the audio system on/off, and turn to adjust the volume.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

5-1. Basic Operations 337
"Menu" screen To display the "Menu" screen, press the "MENU" button on the controller unit.

Button "Radio" "Media" "Climate" "Phone" "Info" "Setup" "Display"

Function

Display the radio top screen (P. 361)

Display the media top screen (P. 367, 374, 377, 381, 386)

Automatic air conditioning system (P. 430)

Display the phone top screen (P. 392)

Display the "Information" screen (P. 418)

Setup menu (P. 347)

Display settings (P. 352)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

338 5-1. Basic Operations Lexus Display Audio controller
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio system, hands-free system, etc. 1 Display the "Source" screen or
audio top screen (P. 353) 2 Display the "Menu" screen
(P. 337) 3 Back button
Display the previous screen 4 Turn or move the controller to select
a function and number. Move the controller to display the left or right side of the screen. Push the controller to enter the selected function and number. Using the Lexus Display Audio controller 1 Select: Turn or move the control-
ler. 2 Enter: Push the controller.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Lexus Display Audio system

5-1. Basic Operations 339
Basic screen operation When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the list. 1 Indicator turns on when you can select the list by turning the controller. 2 Indicator turns on when you can return to the previous screen by pressing the back button. 3 Indicator turns on when you can move the controller left to view additional screen text. 4 Indicator turns on when you can move the controller right to view additional screen text.
5
NX300h_U_OM78007U

340 5-1. Basic Operations
Inputting letters and numbers
Input mode Letters and numbers are inputted via the screen. 1 Turn the controller to select the desired character and press the controller to input the character. 2 When this indicator is shown, you can change input fields by moving the controller forward. 3 When this indicator is shown, you can change character types by moving the controller to the right and then selecting the desired character type. 4 Select to erase characters one by one. Select and hold to erase all characters. 5 Select to complete data input.
Input field mode When in the input field you can move the cursor to the desired position. 1 Turn the controller to move the cursor left or right. 2 When this indicator is shown, you can move the cursor to the right input field by moving the controller to the right. 3 When this indicator is shown, you can move the cursor to the left input field by moving the controller to the left. 4 When this indicator is shown, you can change to input mode by moving the controller backward.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-1. Basic Operations

341

When using the screen Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react slowly. If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal. The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the "Display" screen (P. 352) or remove your sunglasses.
Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
WARNING

Using the Lexus Display Audio controller

Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temperatures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

Laser product

CAUTION

USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCE-

DURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARD-

OUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

CAUTION

THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL

INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

NOTICE
To prevent Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning. Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or strong impact as the controller may bend or break off.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

342 5-1. Basic Operations
Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.
Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches
1 Volume switch · Increases/decreases volume · Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume
2 Radio mode: · Press: Select a radio station · Press and hold: Seek up/down CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, Bluetooth®, iPod or USB mode: · Press: Select a track/file/video · Press and hold: Quickly move up/down through tracks/files/videos.
3 "MODE" switch · Turns the power on, selects audio source · Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation. To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.
WARNING To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Mobile Assistant

5-1. Basic Operations 343

The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple's Siri Eyes Free mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth. (P. 382)
1 Press and hold the off hook switch until you hear the beeps that indicate the system is listening.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used

only when the neighboring screen is

displayed.

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select "Cancel", or press and hold the off hook switch. To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the off hook switch. Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command. After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

344 5-1. Basic Operations
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the "PWR·VOL" knob or
steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized. Microphone It is not necessary to speak directly into the microphone when using the Mobile Assistant. Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant. The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations:
· When spoken too quickly. · When spoken at a low or high volume. · When the roof or windows are open. · When passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used. · When the air conditioning system's fan speed is set high. · When the air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone. Mobile Assistant precautions The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the connected device. Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available. If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth, an error message will be displayed on the screen. While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used. If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

USB/AUX ports

5-1. Basic Operations 345

Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the USB/ AUX port as indicated below. Select "iPod", "USB", "AUX" or "A/V" on the audio source selection screen and the device can be operated via Lexus Display Audio system.

Connecting using the USB/AUX port
1 Lift the lid while pushing the button to release the lock.

2 Open the cover.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

346 5-1. Basic Operations
iPod Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
USB memory Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power, if applicable, of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
Portable audio player Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on. The notch in console box allows audio cables to be passed through even when the console box is closed.
WARNING While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Setup menu

5-2. Setup 347

The Lexus Display Audio system can be adjusted to the desired settings.

Display "Setup" screen

"Setup" screen: "MENU" button "Setup"

1 Change the settings for operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (P. 348)

2 Adjust the settings for voice guidance volume and voice recognition prompts. (P. 351)

3 Change the settings for registering,

removing, connecting and disconnecting Bluetooth® devices.

(P. 384, 385, 386, 387)

4 Change the settings for FM radio, iPod, etc. (P. 355)

5 Change the settings for vehicle customization. (P. 633)

6 Change the settings for phone sound, phonebook, etc. (P. 403)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

348 5-2. Setup
General settings
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen animation, etc.
Screen for general settings
"General Settings" screen: "MENU" button "Setup" "General" 1 Change language.
The selectable languages may differ depending on the model or region.
2 Set the beep sound on/off. 3 Change the button color. 4 Change the startup image and
screen off image. (P. 349) 5 Set the animation effect on/off. 6 Delete personal data (P. 350) 7 Update program versions.
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
8 Update gracenote database versions.
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
9 Display the open source license.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-2. Setup 349
Customizing images
1 Go to "Customize Images": "MENU" button "Setup" "General" "Customize Images"
2 Select "Set Images" and then select the desired image. 1 Set as startup image. 2 Set as screen off image. 3 Set as startup image and screen off image.

Adding an image

1 Connect a USB memory device. (P. 345)

2 Select "Copy from USB" on the "Customize Images" screen and then

select the desired image.

3 Move the controller to the left and then select "Copy".

Up to 10 images can be downloaded.
Deleting images

Select "Delete Images" on the "Customize Images" screen and then select the desired images.

USB memory When saving the images to a USB memory device, name the folder that the images are saved to "Image". Compatible device formats The following device format can be used: · USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps) · File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows) · Correspondence class: Mass storage class The following types of files can be used: · The image's file format must be JPEG. · The file name may only contain ASCII characters. JPEG file compatibility Compatible image size: Maximum 5MB

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

350 5-2. Setup
NOTICE To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
P. 380
Deleting personal data
1 "MENU" button "Setup" "General" "Delete Personal Data" 2 Select "Delete".
Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.
· Phonebook data · Call history data · Favorite data · Bluetooth® devices data · Phone sound settings · Detailed Bluetooth® settings · Audio/video setting · Preset switch data · Last used radio station · Customized image data · FM info setting · iPod tagging information · Software update history · Software update detail information · Phone display setting · Contact/call history setting · Messaging setting · Traffic information map · Weather information · Phonebook data for voice recognition · Music data for voice recognition
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Voice settings

5-2. Setup

351

You can adjust the guidance volume setting.
Go to "Voice Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Voice" 1 Adjust the voice guidance volume
setting. 2 Set the voice recognition prompts
on/off.

Return to the default settings Move the controller to the left and select "Default".
5

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

352 5-2. Setup
Display settings
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of the screen. The display can also be turned off.
Screen for display settings
Go to "Display": "MENU" button "Display" 1 Turn off screen. 2 Adjust screen quality. 3 Adjust screen quality of the rear
view monitor camera. 4 Change to day mode.
Screen off
This setting turns the screen off. To turn it on, press any button such as the "AUDIO" button or "MENU" button.
If a screen off image has been set, the set image will be displayed.
Day mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims. However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting "Day Mode".
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until "Day Mode" is selected again.
Adjusting the screen quality
1 Select "General" or "Camera" on the "Display" screen or select "Display" on each audio menu screen. (P. 358)
2 Adjust the display as desired by turning the controller clockwise (+) or counterclockwise (-).
To select "Contrast", "Brightness", "Color" or "Tone", move the controller to the left. ("Color" and "Tone" are available when "Display" on the audio settings screen for each audio source is selected.)
Changing the sample image (when "General" is selected) Move the controller to the right and select the desired sample image.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-3. Using the audio system 353
Selecting the audio source

Switching between audio sources, such as the radio and CD, is explained in this section.

Changing audio source
1 Press the "AUDIO" button to display the "Source" screen.
If the "Source" screen is not displayed, press the button again.
2 Select the desired audio source.
The audio source can be selected by pressing the "RADIO" or "MEDIA" button.
Using the steering wheel switches to change audio sources
Press the "MODE" switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes each time the "MODE" switch is pressed.

Rearranging the list

The listing order of the source list can be rearranged.

1 Move the controller to the left while on the "Source" screen.

2 Select "Audio Source Select".

3 Select an item you wish to move and then select where to move the item to.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

354 5-3. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
On the "Sound Settings" screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/Bass), volume balance and DSP settings can be adjusted.
How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality
1 Audio menu screen. (P. 358) 2 Select "Sound Settings". To change between the sound setting screen and DSP setting screen, move the controller to the right then select the desired screen. "Sound Settings"
1 2 3 Adjusts the treble, mid or bass.
4 Adjusts the front/rear audio balance.
5 Adjusts the left/right audio balance.
"DSP" 1 Sets the automatic sound levelizer (ASL) on/off 2 Sets the surround function on/off
The sound quality level is adjusted individually The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode separately.
About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle speed.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Audio settings

5-3. Using the audio system 355

Screen for audio settings
Go to "Audio Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Audio" 1 Change radio settings (P. 355) 2 Change iPod settings (P. 356) 3 Change A/V settings (P. 356) 4 Change the cover art settings
(P. 357) 5 Change USB settings (P. 357)

Changing radio settings

To change radio settings, select "Radio Settings" on the "Audio Settings" screen

or radio menu screen. (P. 358)

1 Set the displaying RBDS text mes-

sage on/off

2 Change the number of radio presets

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

356 5-3. Using the audio system Changing iPod settings
To change iPod settings, select "iPod Settings" on the "Audio Settings" screen or iPod menu screen. (P. 358) 1 Change the screen size (video
mode) 2 Change the cover art settings
(P. 357) 3 Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 352) 4 Change video sound input port
Changing A/V settings
To change A/V settings, select "External Video Settings" on the "Audio Settings" screen or A/V menu screen. (P. 358) 1 Change the screen size 2 Change the video signal 3 Adjust the screen quality (video
mode) (P. 352)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-3. Using the audio system 357

Changing the cover art settings
To change the cover art settings, select "Cover Art Settings" on the "Audio Settings" screen, CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc menu screen. (P. 358)
1 Select to set the cover art display of the DISC mode on/off.
2 Select to set the cover art display of the USB mode on/off.
3 Change the priority of the Gracenote database of the USB mode.
4 Select to set the cover art display of the iPod mode on/off.
5 Change the priority of the Gracenote database of the iPod mode.

Changing USB settings

To change USB settings, select "USB Settings" on the "Audio Settings" screen or

USB menu screen. (P. 358)

1 Change the cover art settings (P. 357)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

358 5-3. Using the audio system
Audio menu screen operation
You can change the settings and control functions for each audio source.
Audio menu screen
To display the audio menu screen, move the controller to the left while on an audio top screen. AM, FM radio or XM Satellite Radio
1 Scans for receivable stations (AM, FM radio)
2 Seeks a station of the nearest frequency (stops when a station is found) (AM, FM radio)
3 Captures the song title and artist name information for potential purchase (when the "HD)" indicator on the selected station is appears) (FM radio)
4 Changes the channel of HD Radio (HD2, HD3, HD4 where applicable) (FM radio)
5 Seeks a station of the traffic announcement (FM radio) 6 Selects to set the station list shows of HD radio on/off (AM, FM radio) 7 Changes radio settings (P. 355) 8 Changes sound settings (P. 354)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-3. Using the audio system 359

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, iPod, USB or Bluetooth®

1 Plays or pauses a track/file

2 Selects a track/file

3 Selects a folder/album (MP3/ WMA/AAC disc or USB)

4 Selects and hold: Fast-forward or rewind a track/file

5 Selects a repeat mode. (P. 360)

6 Selects a random/shuffle play mode. (P. 360)

7 Selects a full screen mode (iPod video mode)

8 Changes iPod settings (iPod) (P. 356)

9 Changes USB settings (USB)

(P. 357)

10 Connects a Bluetooth device (Bluetooth®) (P. 385)

11 Changes the cover art settings (CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc) (P. 357)

12 Changes sound settings (P. 354)

A/V

1 Selects full screen mode

2 Changes A/V settings (P. 356)

3 Changes sound settings (P. 354)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

360 5-3. Using the audio system

Repeat play

Mode

Action File/track repeat

Folder repeat

Album repeat

Target audio source All media MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB USB, Bluetooth®

Random/shuffle playback

Mode

Action

Target audio source

Random/shuffle play of the disc/ folder/album

All media

Random play of all folders

MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB

Random/shuffle play of all albums iPod, USB, Bluetooth®

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Radio operation

5-4. Using the radio

361

Select "AM", "FM" or "SAT" on the audio source selection screen to begin listening to the radio.

Radio top screen
Pressing the "RADIO" button displays the radio top screen from any screen of the selected source. Menu screen
P. 358

Selecting a station (AM or FM radio)

Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.

Seek tuning

Press and hold then release "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button.

Seek tuning can also be operated on the menu screen. (P. 358)

The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found.

Manual tuning

Turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob.

Preset stations

Select the desired preset station by pressing "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or controller.

Station list

1 Move the controller to the right and selecting "Station List".

2 AM radio: Selecting a desired station.

FM radio: Selecting a desired type of station and selecting a desired station.

To refreshing the station list, select "Refresh". Select "Source" on the refresh screen, can be change to the other audio source while refreshing.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

362 5-4. Using the radio Selecting an HD Radio channel
When "HD Radio" is set to "On", available stations with HD Radio channels are marked with "HD)". 1 In AM or FM mode, select a station marked with "HD)". 2 Turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob to select an HD Radio channel.
HD Radio channels can also be selected by selecting "Multicast" on the menu screen. (P. 358)
Selecting a channel (XM Satellite Radio)
Select in to the desired channel using one of the following methods. Turning up/down the channel
Press and hold "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob. Preset channels Select the desired preset channel by pressing "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or controller. Channel list 1 Move the controller to the right and selecting "Select a SAT Category". 2 Selecting a desired category of channel and selecting a desired channel.
Setting presets
1 Search for desired stations or channel. 2 Select and hold one of the preset until you hear a beep.
Display the text message
Display the song information Move the controller to the right and selecting "Text".
Display the Additional information (AM, FM radio) Move the controller to the right and selecting "Additional Information".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-4. Using the radio 363

HD RadioTM Technology

HD RadioTM Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives.

Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

"HD Radio features included in Lexus radios: Digital Sound - HD Radio broadcasts deliver crystal-clear, digital audio quality to listeners. HD2/HD3 Channels - FM stations can provide additional digital only audio programming with expanded content and format choices on HD2/HD3 channels.

PSD - Program Service Data (PSD) gives you on-screen information such as art-

ist name and song title.

iTunes Tagging - Listeners can tag (store) songs they like for later review and pur-

chase through iTunes.

Artist Experience - Images related to the broadcast are displayed on the radio

screen, such as album cover art and station logos."

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and "Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

364 5-4. Using the radio

HD RadioTM Technology troubleshooting guide

Experience

Cause

Action

Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog and digital volume are not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact the radio station.

Reception issue, may

clear-up as the vehicle

Sound fades, blending in Radio is shifting between continues to be driven. Set

and out.

analog and digital audio. "HD Radio" to off, can

force radio in an analog

audio.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital signals at the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new station.

The digital multicast con-

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.

tent is not available until HD RadioTM broadcast can be decoded and make the audio available. This takes

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available.

up to 7 seconds.

Broadcaster should be

Text information does not match the present song audio.

Data service issue at the radio broadcaster.

notified. Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/ automotive/ report_radio_station_

experiences.

Broadcaster should be

No text information shown for the present selected frequency.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

notified. Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/ automotive/ report_radio_station_

experiences.

Reception sensitivity Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc. The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-4. Using the radio 365

XM Radio Services -- Descriptions Radio and Entertainment XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada). Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
XM Radio Services -- Subscription Instructions For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.

Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners.

For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after

complimentary trial period; more information is available at: U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987

Canadian Customers: Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or reporting a problem. If "Ch000" is selected using the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code.
XM Radio Services -- Legal Disclaimers and Warnings Fees and Taxes -- Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United
States and Canada*. *: Canada -- some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes.
This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice -- Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an "XL" preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at; U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987 Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

366 5-4. Using the radio

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices. If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

SAT Check Antenna

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.

SAT Ch Unauthorized

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose "Ch000" and all free-toair channels. The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or "Ch001". If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

SAT No Signal

The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

SAT Loading

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

SAT Channel Off Air

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required.

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for

SAT Chan Unavailable

about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or "Ch001". If it does not change automatically,

select another channel.

Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-4389677 (Canada).

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

367

CD player operation

Insert a disc, press the "MEDIA" button or select "DISC" on the "Source" screen with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.

CD top screen

Pressing the "MEDIA" button displays the CD top screen from any screen of the selected source.

Menu screen

P. 358

Selecting a track/file

Press the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob to select the desired track/file number.

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK"

button.

Selecting the track by the list (CD)

Move the controller to the right and then select the desired track.

Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)

1 Move the controller to the right and then select "Folders".

2 Select the desired folder. Then select a file to begin using the selected folder.

Selecting a file by the selected folder (MP3/WMA/AAC disc)

1 Move the controller to the right and then select "Files".

2 Select the desired file.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

368 5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

Error messages If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Message "Check disc"
"DISC Error" "No music files found."

Cause

Correction procedures

· The disc is dirty or dam-

aged.

· Clean the disc.

· The disc is inserted · Insert the disc correctly.

upside down.

· Confirm the disc is play-

· The disc is not playable able with the player.

with the player.

There is a malfunction within the system.

Eject the disc.

No playable data included on the disc.

is Eject the disc.

Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly. CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods Disc may be damaged and may not play properly. Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. MP3, WMA and AAC files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4. MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

369

MP3 file compatibility

· Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
· Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural WMA file compatibility

· Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Window Media Audio Standard)
· Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
AAC file compatibility

· Compatible standards

MPEG4/AAC-LC

· Compatible sampling frequencies

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

· Compatible bit rates

16-320 (kbps)

· Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch

Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

· Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
· File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

· Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root) · Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters · Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) · Maximum number of files per disc: 255

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

370 5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
Discs containing multi-session recordings As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.
ID3, WMA and AAC tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3, WMA and AAC playback When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data cannot be played.
Extensions If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
Playback · To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. · CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. · There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

371

The Gracenote® media database Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

372

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
NOTICE
Discs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of discs. Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs. Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.

373

5 Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm). Low-quality or deformed discs. Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area. Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the
label peeled off. Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself. Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot. Do not apply oil to the player. Store discs away from direct sunlight. Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

374 5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. Press the "MEDIA" button or select "iPod" on the audio source selection screen.
Connecting an iPod
P. 345
iPod top screen
Pressing the "MEDIA" button displays the iPod top screen from any screen of the selected source. Menu screen
P. 358 Selecting a song
Press the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob to select the desired song number. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button. Selecting a play mode 1 Move the controller to the right and then select "Browse". 2 Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the
selected play mode. Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and then select "Now Playing List".
About iPod
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-6. Using an external device 375

"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to an iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod cover art

Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

This function can be changed to on/off. (P. 357)

It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

iPod functions

When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

Depending on the iPod, while connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated

with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system

instead.

When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use.

Compatible models (P. 376)

iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.

Error messages

If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Message

Cause/Correction procedures

"Connection error."

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

"There are no songs available for playback."

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

"No items available."

This indicates that songs are not found in a selected playlist.

"Please check the iPod This indicates that the software version is not compatible.

firmware version."

Please check the compatible models. (P. 376)

"iPod authorization failed."

This indicates that the Lexus Display Audio system failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

376 5-6. Using an external device
Compatible models The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. Made for · iPod touch (5th generation) · iPod touch (4th generation) · iPod touch (3rd generation) · iPod touch (2nd generation) · iPod touch (1st generation) · iPod classic · iPod with video · iPod nano (7th generation) · iPod nano (6th generation) · iPod nano (5th generation) · iPod nano (4th generation) · iPod nano (3rd generation) · iPod nano (2nd generation) · iPod nano (1st generation) · iPhone 5 · iPhone 4S · iPhone 4 · iPhone 3GS · iPhone 3G · iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions, etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. NOTICE
To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected. Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Lexus Display Audio system

5-6. Using an external device 377
Using USB memory device
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers. Select "USB1" or "USB2" on the audio source selection screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
P. 345
USB top screen
Pressing the "MEDIA" button displays the USB top screen from any screen of the selected source. Menu screen
P. 358 Selecting a file
Press the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or turn the 5 "TUNE·SCROLL" knob to select the desired file number. To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button. Selecting a play mode 1 Move the controller to the right and select "Browse". 2 Select the desired play mode, then select a file to begin the selected play
mode. Displaying the now playing list
Move the controller to the right and select "Now Playing List".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

378 5-6. Using an external device

USB memory functions Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem. If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the device.
Error messages for USB memory If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Message

Cause/Correction procedures

"Connection error."

This indicates a problem with the USB memory device or its connection.

"There are no files available for This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are

playback."

included on the USB memory device.

USB memory Compatible devices USB memory devices that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback. Compatible device formats The following device format can be used: · USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps) · File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows) · Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: · Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels · Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root) · Maximum number of files in a device: 9999 · Maximum number of files per folder: 255

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-6. Using an external device 379

MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

MP3 file compatibility

· Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII)
· Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII: 8-160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural WMA file compatibility

· Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Window Media Audio Standard) · Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

· Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)

AAC file compatibility

· Compatible standards MPEG4/AAC-LC
· Compatible sampling frequencies 11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates 16-320 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

380 5-6. Using an external device
MP3, WMA and AAC playback · When a device containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders. · When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Extensions If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
Playback · To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. · There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device while it is connected. Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Using the AUX port

5-6. Using an external device

381

To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the "MEDIA" button or select "AUX" or "A/V" on the "Source" screen.

Connecting a portable player
P. 345
Top screen
Pressing the "MEDIA" button displays the top screen from any screen of the selected source. Menu screen
P. 358

Operating portable players connected to the audio system

Volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable player itself.

When using a portable player connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable player.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the portable player or its terminal Do not leave portable player in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected. Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

382 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Steps for using Bluetooth® devices
The following can be performed using Bluetooth® wireless communication: A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via the Lexus Display Audio system Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone
In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a Bluetooth® device by performing the following procedures.
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth® device to be used with Lexus Display Audio system (P. 384)

2. Select the Bluetooth® device to be used (P. 385)

Audio

Hands-free phone

3. Start Bluetooth® connection (P. 386)

3. Start Bluetooth® connection (P. 387)

4. Check connection status (P. 390)

4. Check connection status (P. 393)

5. Use Bluetooth® audio (P. 390)

5. Use Bluetooth® phone (P. 394)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Lexus Display Audio system

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® 383 "Bluetooth* Setup" screen Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*" *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. When displaying "Bluetooth* Setup" screen from the "Bluetooth* Audio" screen
1 Display the "Bluetooth* Audio" screen. (P. 390)
2 Move the controller to the left and select "Connect".
When displaying "Bluetooth* Setup" screen from the phone top screen
1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 392) 2 Move the controller to the left and select "Connect Phone".
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5
NX300h_U_OM78007U

384 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Registering a Bluetooth® device
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5 Bluetooth® devices.
How to register a Bluetooth® device
1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your device set to on.
2 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"
3 Move the controller to the left and then select "Add Device" 4 When this screen is displayed, input
the passcode displayed on the screen into your Bluetooth® device.
For operation of the Bluetooth® device, sBelueettoheothm®andueavlicteh.at comes with your
5 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.
A PIN code are not required for SSP (BSlueectuoroeth®SimdpevleicePs.aDirienpge) ndcionmg poantitbhlee device, you may need to select Yes to register, or No to cancel on the device. If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Removing a Bluetooth® device 1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"
2 Move the controller to the left and then select "Remove Device". 3 Select the device to remove.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Lexus Display Audio system

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® 385
Selecting a Bluetooth® device
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device at a time.
How to select a Bluetooth® device 1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"
2 Select the device to connect. 3 Select "Connect All", "Connect as a Phone" or "Connect as an Audio Player". "Connect All" means connect both the telephone and audio functions of one device. If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device. (P. 384)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5
NX300h_U_OM78007U

386 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player
There are 2 portable audio player connection settings available: connecting from the vehicle and connecting from the portable player.
Connecting method is set to "Vehicle"
When the portable audio player is in standby for a connection, it will be automatically connected whenever the power switch is in either ACCESSORY or ON mode.
Connecting method is set to "Device"
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio system.
1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"
2 Select the device to connect. 3 Select "Connect All" or "Connect as an Audio player". If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device. (P. 384)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® 387
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone

There are two connecting methods available: automatic and manual.

Auto connection
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. It is recommended to have the system set to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where a good connection can be established.
When the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent phone that was connected. The connected result is displayed.

Manual connection

When auto connection has failed or "Bluetooth* Power" is turned off, you must

connect the Bluetooth® device manually.

1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"

2 Select the device to connect.

3 Select "Connect All", "Connect as a Phone" or "Connect as an Audio player". If the desired Bluetooth® device is not displayed, register the device. (P. 384)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Reconnecting a Bluetooth® phone If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect. If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, the connection must be made manually, or the phone must be reselected.
Connecting a phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily. It may take time to connect.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

388 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Displaying a Bluetooth® device details
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth® device registration status 1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"
2 Select the desired device and then select "Device Info". 1 Change the name of the device 2 Change the connection method
"Vehicle": Connect the audio system to the portable audio player. "Device": Connect the portable audio player to the audio system
3 Device address 4 Device telephone number
Depending on the model of phone, the number may not be displayed.
5 Compatibility profile of the device
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Restoring the default settings Move the controller to the left and select "Default" on the "Device Information" screen.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-7. Connecting Bluetooth® 389
Detailed Bluetooth® settings

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.

How to check and change detailed Bluetooth® settings

1 Go to "Bluetooth* Setup": "MENU" button "Setup" "Bluetooth*"

2 Move the controller to the left and then select "System Settings".
1 Select to set the Bluetooth® function on/off.

2 Change the name of the device.

3 Change the PIN-code.

You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth® devices in the system.
4 Device address

5 Select to set the display of the

telephone status on/off

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting a telephone.
6 Select to set the display of the audio player status on/off

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting an audio player.
7 Compatibility profile of the system
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Restoring the default settings Move the controller to the left and select "Default" on the "System Settings" screen.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

390 5-8. Bluetooth® Audio
Listening to Bluetooth® Audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables the user to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
When a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection status
on the "Bluetooth* Audio" screen. If the device is not connected, either register
or reconnect the device. (P. 384, 386)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Status display
You can check indicators, such as, signal strength and battery charge on the screen. 1 Connection status 2 Battery charge Depending on the type of portable audio player used, some titles may not be displayed.

Indicators Connection status Battery charge

Good Full

Conditions Not connected
Empty

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-8. Bluetooth® Audio

391

Bluetooth® audio top screen

Pressing the "MEDIA" button displays the Bluetooth® audio top screen from any screen of the selected source.

Menu screen

P. 358

Selecting a song

Press the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button or turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob to select the desired song number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the "" or "" on the "PRST·TRACK" button.

Selecting a play mode

1 Move the controller to the right and then select "Browse".

2 Select the desired play mode, and then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

Displaying the now playing list

Move the controller to the right and then select "Now Playing List".

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

392

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

Using a Bluetooth® Phone

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular phone without touching it. This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call area and signal strength. (P. 393) If a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection status. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (P. 384, 387)
Phone top screen
To display the screen shown below, press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select "Phone" on the "Menu" screen.
1 Phone name 2 Bluetooth® connection status
(P. 393) 3 Displays the call history screen
(P. 396) 4 Displays the favorites screen
(P. 396) 5 Displays the contacts screen
(P. 394) 6 Displays the dial pad screen (P. 394) 7 Displays the message inbox screen (P. 400)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Telephone switch (P. 402)
Microphone
The vehicle's built-in microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person to whom you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

393

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in the system. (P. 384)

Status display

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on any

screen.

1 Connection status

2 Signal strength

3 Battery charge

Indicators Connection status Battery charge Signal strength

Good Full Excellent

Conditions Poor

Not connected Empty Poor

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

394

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

Making a call

Once a Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the following procedure:

Dialing
1 Go to "Dial Pad": "MENU" button "Phone" "Dial Pad" 2 Input a phone number. (P. 340) 3 Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each registered telephone. Up to 2500 contacts may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 395) 1 Go to "Contacts": "MENU" button "Phone" "Contacts" 2 Choose the desired contact to call from the list. 3 Choose the number and then press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel
or press the controller.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

395

When the phonebook is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If the cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer contacts.
1 Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.
For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone and "Automatic Transfer" is off
2 To transfer new contacts from a cellular phone, select "Always" and then enable "Automatic Transfer". (P. 405) Select "Once" if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone.

5
For a PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone
2 Select "Transfer" and operate your cellular phone to transfer new contacts from a cellular phone.
Select "Add" if you want to add a new contact manually.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

396

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

Dialing from favorites
You can make a call using numbers registered in the favorites. 1 Go to "Favorites": "MENU" button "Phone" "Favorites" 2 Choose the desired contact to call from the list. 3 Choose the number and then press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel
or press the controller.
Dialing from history
You can make a call using the call history. 1 Go to "Call History": "MENU" button "Phone" "Call History" 2 Select the desired entry from the list. 3 Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

Call history list If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phonebook, the name is displayed in the call history. If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.
International calls Depending on the mobile phone in use, you may not be able to make international calls.
Calling by using the latest call history entry 1 Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel to display the phone top screen. 2 Press the switch again switch on the steering wheel to display the "Call History" screen. 3 Press the switch again switch on the steering wheel to select the latest call history entry.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Receiving a call

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

397

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

To answer the phone
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

To refuse a call

Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

International calls Depending on the cellular phone in use, received international calls may not be displayed correctly.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

398 5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
To adjust the transmit volume
Select "Transmit Volume". To restore default volume, move the controller to the left on the "Transmit Volume" screen and then select "Default".
To adjust in call volume
Move the controller to the left and then select "In-call Volume". You can also adjust the volume using the "PWR·VOL" knob or the steering switches.
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select "Mute".
Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contacts using "p" or "w" symbols (eg. 056133 w 0123p#1). Contact including a phone number only
1 Move the controller to the left and then select "0-9". 2 Input the number. Phone number containing a "p" symbol When the "p" symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, there will be a pause for 2 seconds before the following digits are dialed automatically.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

399

Phone number containing a "w" symbol
When the "w" symbol is dialed in an outgoing call, you need to go to the "Release Tones" screen to dial the following digits. Move the controller to the left and then select "Release Tones".

To transfer a call
Select "Handset Mode" to change from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call or vice versa.

To hang up
Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

To refuse the call:

Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .

Every time you press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

during

Transferring calls It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while driving. If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen. Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used. For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone's manual.
Call waiting operation Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

400 5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using a Bluetooth® phone message
Once a MAP-profile compatible Bluetooth phone is registered, you can check the E-mail/SMS/MMS and reply to a message using the following procedures:
Checking messages
1 Go to message screen: "MENU" button "Phone" "Messages" 2 Select a message.
Moving the controller to the left while on the message list screen displays the setting screen. (P. 408) Move the controller to the right while on the message screen and then select an account to display a message list for the selected account.
Message screen
Selecting "Next" or "Previous" displays the next or previous message. If a message is too long, select "Read More" to display the full text. Option menu
Move the controller to the left while on the message screen. 1 Select a prepared message and
send a reply message. 2 Call a sender.
If more than one phone number is registered for a sender, a phone number selection screen will be displayed.
3 Call a phone number written in a message. 4 Select "Play" to have a message read out loud.
Select "Stop" to stop this function. 5 Select "Mark Unread" to mark mail that has been read as unread. Select
"Mark Read" to mark mail that has not been read as read.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone

401

Replying to a message
1 Move the controller to the left while on the message screen. 2 Select "Quick Message" to display the "Quick Message" screen. 3 Select the desired message and then select "Send". Editing a quick message
1 Move the controller to the left while on the message screen. 2 Select "Quick Message" and move the cursor to the desired message. 3 Move the controller to the left and select "Edit".
To return to the default message after editing, select "Default".
Receiving a message popup function
This function is available when the "E-mail Notification Popup" or "SMS/MMS Notification Popup" are set to on. (P. 408) "Incoming E-mail Display" or "Incoming SMS/MMS Display" are set to
"Drop-Down" When E-mail/ SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message is displayed 5 on the upper side of the screen with a sound. "Incoming E-mail Display" or "Incoming SMS/MMS Display" are set to "Full Screen" When E-mail/ SMS/MMS are received, the incoming message screen is displayed with a sound and it can be operated on the screen.
1 Check the message. 2 Refuse to check the message. 3 Call to receive the message
sender's phone number.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

402 5-9. Bluetooth® Phone
Using the steering wheel switches
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cellular phone.
Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches
1 Volume switch During an incoming call: Adjusts the ring tone volume During speaking on the phone: Adjusts in call volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
2 Off-hook switch · Start call · Receiving · Phone top screen display
3 On-hook switch · End call · Refuse call
4 Talk switch Press: Turns the voice command system on Press and hold: Turns the voice command system off
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Bluetooth® phone settings

5-9. Bluetooth® Phone 403

You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.

"Phone/Message Settings" screen
Go to "Phone/Message Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" 1 Register and connect a Bluetooth®
device. (P. 384) 2 Adjust the call volume and message
readout volume. (P. 403) 3 Change the contact/call history set-
tings. (P. 405) 4 Change messaging settings.
(P. 408) 5 Change phone display settings. (P. 404)
5
Sound settings
Go to "Sound Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Sound Settings"
1 Change the ring tone type
2 Adjust the ring tone volume
3 Adjust the message readout volume
4 Change the incoming SMS/MMS tone type
5 Adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume
6 Change the incoming e-mail tone type
7 Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume
8 Adjust in call tone volume

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

404 5-9. Bluetooth® Phone Phone display settings
Go to "Phone Display Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Phone Display Settings" 1 Change the incoming call display 2 Set the phonebook/history transfer
status notification display on/off
To return to the default volume settings Move the controller to the left and then select "Default".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Contact settings

5-10. Phonebook 405

Individual phonebooks from up to 5 phones can be registered to the system. The data for 2500 contacts (up to 4 numbers per contact) can be registered into the system's phonebook.

"Contact/Call History Settings" screen

Go to "Contact/Call History Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Contact/Call History Settings"

1 Select to set the automatic phonebook download on/off

With this setting on, phonebook data will be automatically transferred.

Depending on the cellular phone, call history will be also transferred.

2 Update contacts

3 Change the sort contacts mode

4 Add a favorite (P. 406)

5 Delete a favorite (P. 407)

6 Select to set the display of contact images on/off

7 Delete call history. (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible phones with "Automatic Transfer" off)
8 Add a new contact (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible phones with "Automatic Transfer" off)

Input the name, phone number and phone number type to add a new contact.
9 Edit a contact (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible phones with "Automatic Transfer" off)

Select the desired contact to edit.
10 Delete contacts (P. 407) (PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones, or compatible phones with "Automatic Transfer" off)

Return to the default settings Move the controller to the left and select "Default".

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

406 5-10. Phonebook Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts. Go to "Transfer Contacts": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Contact/ Call History Settings" "Update Contacts from Phone" For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones when "Automatic Transfer" is set to
on Start the update automatically. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones when "Automatic Transfer" is set to off and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones 1 Select to transfer the contact from the connected cellular phone and replace the current one. 2 Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one.
Registering favorites
You can register the desired contact from the phonebook. Up to 15 contacts per phone can be registered. 1 Go to "Add Favorite": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Contact/
Call History Settings" "Add Favorite" 2 Choose the contact to register.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-10. Phonebook 407

Removing favorites
1 Go to "Remove Favorite": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Contact/Call History Settings" "Remove Favorite"
2 Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting "Select All".
3 Move the controller to the left and select "Remove".
Deleting the contacts data
1 Go to "Delete Contacts": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Contact/Call History Settings" "Delete Contacts"
2 Select the desired contacts.
You can select all contacts by selecting "Select All".
3 Move the controller to the left and select "Delete".

Phonebook data

Phonebook data is managed separately for every registered phone. When one phone is

connected, you cannot read the registered data of the other phones.

When transferring contacts

Transfer contacts while the hybrid system is operating. If the cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input "1234" on the cellular phone for OBEX certification.

When you have selected "Replace contacts" or "Add contact" to transfer contacts

If the cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions. You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone. Transferring contacts while Bluetooth® audio is playing Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer finishes. It may not reconnect depending on the phone which is connected.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

408 5-10. Phonebook
Messaging setting
Go to "Messaging Settings": "MENU" button "Setup" "Phone" "Messaging Settings" 1 Set the message forwarding from
cellular phones on/off 2 Set the automatic message read out
function on/off 3 Set the new SMS/MMS notification
display on/off 4 Set the new e-mail notification dis-
play on/off 5 Set the signature function on/off 6 Set the cellular phone's message
read and unread status update function on/off. 7 Change the incoming SMS/MMS display. 8 Change the incoming e-mail display. 9 Change the account name to "Service name" (names from the connected device) or "Fixed name" (pre-defined names).
Restoring the default settings Move the controller to the left then select "Default" on the "Messaging Settings" screen.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-11. Bluetooth® 409

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check the table below. When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth® device does not work.

The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system,
check with your Lexus dealer or the following website: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the speci-

fied version. Use a cellular

phone

with

Bluetooth®

version

2.0

higher

(recommended:

Ver.

3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 415)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

410

5-11. Bluetooth®

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

A cellular phone cannot be registered. An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone. Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone. The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side. Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration
on the phone). Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone. Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellu-
lar phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (P. 384) A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made. Another Bluetooth® device is already connected. Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (P. 387) Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
When making/receiving a call

A call cannot be made/received. Your vehicle is in a "No Service" area. Move to where "No Service" no longer appears on the display.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

When using the phonebook

5-11. Bluetooth®

411

Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system,
check with your Lexus dealer or the following website: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on. (P. 405)

Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone. Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).

Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed. Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation
on the phone).

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on. Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off. (P. 405)

When using the Bluetooth® message function

Messages cannot be viewed. Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the
phone). Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 405) New message notifications are not displayed. Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off. Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on. (P. 408) Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

412

5-11. Bluetooth®

In other situations

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough to this system. Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.

The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.

Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then

restart Enable

the cellular the cellular

phone. phone's

Bluetooth®

connection.

Stop the cellular phone's security software and close all applications.

Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its

source and how its operation might affect this system.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Bluetooth®

5-11. Bluetooth®

413

When using the Bluetooth® audio system

In the following situations, the system may not function.

· If the portable audio player is turned off · If the portable audio player is not connected · If the portable audio player's battery is low There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during Bluetooth® audio play.

Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

When using the hands-free system

The audio system is muted when making a call.

If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.

In the following situations, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

· When driving on unpaved roads · When driving at high speeds

· If a window is open

· If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

· If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone

Depending on the type phone, certain functions may not be available.

Conditions under which the system will not operate If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®

If the cellular phone is turned off

If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage

If the cellular phone is not connected

If the cellular phone's battery is low

When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

When the cellular phone itself cannot be used

When transferring phonebook data from the cellular phone

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

414

5-11. Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® antenna The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
Battery charge/signal status This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular phone itself. This system does not have a charging function. The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the device is connected to Bluetooth®.
When using the Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time The following problems may occur. The Bluetooth® audio connection may be interrupted. Noise may be heard during Bluetooth® audio playback.
About the contact in this system The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data. Contact data Call history Favorite Message When removing a Bluetooth® phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-11. Bluetooth®

415

Compatible models The Bluetooth® audio system supports portable audio players with the following specifications Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)

Profiles:

· A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher) This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.
· AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher) This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.

The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifications. Bluetooth® specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher)

Profiles:

· HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher)

This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It

has outgoing and incoming call functions.

· OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. When a Bluetooth® compatible cellular

phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.

· PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1)

This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.

· MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher

This is a profile to using phone message.

If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free sys-

tem. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individually.

Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions below to reconnect:

Select the portable audio player again

Enter the portable audio player

When you sell your car

Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 350)

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

416

5-11. Bluetooth®

Certification FCC ID:AJDK066 IC:775E-K066 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). Co-Location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-11. Bluetooth®

417

WARNING
While driving Do not operate the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the Bluetooth® system.
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE
When leaving the vehicle Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular 5 phone.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

418

5-12. Other function

"Information" screen

Display "Information" screen
Go to "Information": "MENU" button "Info" 1 Display the fuel consumption.
(P. 114) 2 Display the "USB Photo" screen.
(P. 420) 3 Display the weather information.
(P. 422) 4 Display the Traffic Map picture.
Available when in a traffic supported HD Radio coverage area
Traffic information map
Go to "Traffic Map": "MENU" button "Info""Traffic Incidents" 1 Current position of your car 2 Traffic information line The line color means the following: Red: Heavy congestion Yellow: Moderate traffic Green: Free flowing traffic

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Disclaimers

5-12. Other function

419

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

420 5-12. Other function
USB photo
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy photo on the Lexus Display Audio display.
USB photo screen
Go to "USB Photo": "MENU" button "Info" "USB1 Photo" or "USB2 Photo"
Connecting a USB memory device
P. 345
Menu screen
Move the controller to the left to display the menu screen. 1 Change the full screen mode. 2 Select to set the slide show display
on/off.
Start the slide show at a selected folder.
3 Change the play speed. 4 Change the play mode.
Selecting a folder and a file
1 Move the controller to the right and select "Browse". 2 Select the desired folder, and then select a desired file to begin using the
selected folder.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-12. Other function
USB memory functions P. 378
USB memory Compatible devices USB memory device that can be used for JPEG display. Compatible device formats The following device format can be used: · USB communication format: USB2.0 FS (480 Mbps) · File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows) · Correspondence class: Mass storage class JPEG file compatibility · Compatible image size: Maximum 10MB · Compatible pixel size: Maximum 10,000,000 pixels
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals P. 380

421
5

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

422

5-12. Other function

Weather information

Weather information for the selected city is displayed. Available when in weather supported HD Radio coverage area

How to check the weather information
1 Go to "Weather": "MENU" button "Info" "Weather" 2 Select the desired city/location.
1 Current location of your car 2 Select of the recently checked loca-
tion list
Select the desired location on the recently checked location list.
3 Select of the National City list.
Select the region on the region list and then select the city on the National City list.
4 Select of the local location list
Select the location on the local location list.
3 Select the time
1 Display the current weather information.
2 Display the 3 days weather information.
You can display detail of a week, move the controller right and then select the desired week.

3 Display the 6/12 hour weather information.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Voice command system

5-12. Other function

423

The voice command system enables the audio and hands-free systems to be operated using voice commands.
Operations of the voice command system can be performed by selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the right part of the screen. Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on all menus can be operated.

Using the voice command system
1 Press the talk switch.
To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.
2 After a beep sounds, say the desired command.
On the list screen, you can select the desired command.
5
Menu screen
To display the menu screen, move the controller to the left. 1 Offer examples of commands
and operation methods 2 Adjust the settings for voice guid-
ance volume and voice recognition prompts. ("Hints" screen) (P. 351) 3 Start over voice recognition (except "Hints" screen) 4 Cancel voice recognition
Microphone P. 393
When using the microphone It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command. Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

424

5-12. Other function

Voice commands may not be recognized if: · Spoken too quickly. · Spoken at a low or high volume. · The roof or windows are open. · Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. · The air conditioning speed is set high. · The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible: · The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. · There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
When searching for a track A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and playback. (P. 345) When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks can be searched using voice commands. Recognition data is updated under the following conditions: · When the USB memory or iPod data has changed. · When the voice recognition language is changed. (P. 348) While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be performed using a voice command.
The Gracenote® media database P. 371
Casual speech recognition
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.
In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation.
This function is available in English, Spanish and French.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5-12. Other function

425

Expression examples for each function

Command

Expression examples

"Call <name> <type>"

Get me <Robert Brown>. I need to call <Robert Brown> at <Work> right away.

"Dial <number>"

Please dial the number <3334445555>. Ring <3334445555>.

"Play Artist <name>"

PI'dlalyiktehetoahretiastr<tXheXbXaXndX<>X. XXXX>.*

"Play Album <name>"

PMlauysiaclbfruomm<aXlbXuXmX<XXX>.XXX>.*

*: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the "<>".

Command list

Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below as examples.

Basic
Command

5 Action

"Help"

Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands or operation methods

"Go Back"

Returns to the previous screen

"Go to <tab>"

Displays the command list of the selected tab

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

426 5-12. Other function

Phone

Command "Redial"
"Call Back" "Show Recent Calls" "Dial <phone number>" "Call <contacts> <phone types>"
Audio

Action Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call Displays the call history screen Places a call to the said phone number Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the phone book

Command "Play Playlist <playlists>" "Play Artist <artist>" "Play Song <songs>" "Play Album <albums>" "Turn Music On/Off" "Play the <audio sources>"
Info

Action Plays tracks from the selected playlist Plays tracks from the selected artist Plays the selected track Plays tracks from the selected album Turns the audio system on/off Selects audio source

Command "Show Forecast" "Show Traffic"

Action Displays weather information Displays traffic information

NX300h_U_OM78007U

LEXUS Enform Remote

5-12. Other function

427

Lexus Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and remotely control certain aspects of your vehicle.
For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
Function of the Lexus Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).

Subscription

After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement, download the

Lexus Enform Remote app from your cellular phone's app store, and register

within the app (or enroll and complete registration at the dealer), you can begin

using these services. (P. 477)

A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-

800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details.

Lexus Display Audio system

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

428 5-12. Other function
Availability of service Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska.
Lexus Enform Remote Information Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users. Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when operating Lexus Enform Remote. In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before using Lexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws. Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer. Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22F (-30C). This specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on the vehicle's operating temperature range which may be different. Content is subject to change without notice. Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models. Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/. Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception level.
Safety information for Lexus Enform Remote Refer to safety information for Safety Connect: P. 481
NX300h_U_OM78007U

429
6 Interior features

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system ......................................... 430
Heated steering wheel/ seat heaters/ seat ventilators......................... 440
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..........................443
· Front interior light ................444
· Personal lights........................444
· Rear interior light .................445

6-3. Using the storage features List of storage features ............446 · Glove box ............................... 447 · Console box........................... 447 · Cup holders/ bottle holders.........................448 · Sunglass holder .................... 449 Luggage compartment features........................................450
6-4. Other interior features Other interior features ............455 · Sun visors ................................455 · Vanity mirrors ........................455 · Clock ........................................456 · Power outlet (12 VDC)......456 · Power outlet (120 VAC) ... 457 · Wireless charger..................458 · Armrest....................................465 · Assist grips..............................465 · Coat hooks.............................466 Garage door opener................ 467 Compass ........................................473 Safety Connect............................477

NX300h_U_OM78007U

430 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then select "Climate" to display the air conditioning control screen. For details on the Lexus Display Audio controller, refer to "Lexus Display Audio controller" on P. 338. Vehicles with a navigation system: Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select "Climate" to display the air conditioning control screen. For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Control panel

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

431

Adjusting the temperature setting

Press

to increase the temperature and

temperature. Adjusting the fan speed setting

Press

to increase the fan speed and

speed. Press the "OFF" button to turn the fan off.

to decrease the
6
to decrease the fan

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

432

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Change the airflow mode To change the air outlets, press

.
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.
1 Air flows to the upper body. 2 Air flows to the upper body and
feet. 3 Air flows to the feet. 4 Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates.
S-FLOW mode Priority for airflow is given to the front seats, and the airflow and air conditioning for the rear seats is effectively controlled.

Press

The indicator comes on when S-FLOW mode is on.

Press

again to return to the previous mode.

Other functions Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (P. 435) Defogging the windshield (P. 435) Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (P. 435)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

433

Control screen
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system
1 Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
2 Adjust the fan speed setting 3 Select to set auto mode on/off,
fan off and displaying the option control screen (P. 434) 4 Select the air flow mode

5 Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting

1 Move the Lexus Display Audio controller left/right to select the desired item ( 1 to 5 ).

2 When 1 , 2 or 5 is selected:

Move the controller forward/backward or turn it left/right for adjusting. When 3 or 4 is selected: Move the controller forward/backward or turn it left/right to select a screen button, then press the controller.

Vehicles with a navigation system

1 Adjust the left-hand side temper-

ature setting

2 Adjust the fan speed setting

3 Select the air flow mode

4 Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting

5 Display the option control screen (P. 434)

6 Turn the fan off

7 Select to set automatic mode on/off

Using the touchpad of the Remote Touch, select the button on the screen and then activate it by pressing on or double tapping the touchpad.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

434

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Option control screen

Select

on the climate screen to display the option control screen. The

functions can be switched on and off.

Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio Vehicles with a navigation system system

1 Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off 2 Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately ("DUAL"
mode) (P. 435) 3 Prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades
(P. 436) 4 Remove pollen from the air (Micro dust and pollen filter) (P. 436)
Air conditioning controls
Using the automatic mode 1 Press the "AUTO" button. 2 Adjust the temperature setting. 3 To stop the operation, press the "OFF" button.
Automatic mode indicator If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated are maintained.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

435

Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately ("DUAL" mode)
To turn on the "DUAL" mode, perform any of the following procedures: Press the "DUAL" button. Select "DUAL" on the option control screen. Adjust the temperature setting of the passenger side with the passenger
side temperature adjustment button.
The indicator comes on when the "DUAL" mode is on.

Other functions

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches between

(recirculated air mode) and

air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.

(outside

Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press

Set

to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may

switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press

again when the windshield is

defogged.

Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

436

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Micro dust and pollen filter Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Select

on the option control screen.

When the micro dust and pollen filter is on, ing control screen.

is displayed on the air condition-

In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the dehumidification function may operate.

The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.

Windshield wiper de-icer

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

Select

on the option control screen.

When the windshield wiper de-icer is on, ing control screen.

is displayed on the air condition-

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Air outlets

Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected air flow mode.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front

Rear

437

Interior features

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down 2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent

Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys (vehicles with driving position memory)

Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the power switch to ON mode will recall that key's registered air conditioning settings.

When the power switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or

if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.

Tachceedssoosyrsstethmatwciathnpruescha-llbtuhtetoanirstcaortncdaitniobneincghsaentgtiendg.*wFhoernduentaloilcsk, ceodnutasicntgyothuer

smart Lexus

dealer.

*: The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time.

Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the "AUTO" button is pressed or "AUTO" is selected.
When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and the air conditioning system is on

In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is turned to ON mode.

It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

NX300h_U_OM78007U

438 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Pressing "A/C" button or selecting "A/C" will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. If you turn "A/C" off, the windows may fog up more easily. The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Windshield fog detection function When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (P. 439) detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.
Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set

the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when "A/C" is pressed or "A/C" is selected.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency

· Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
· Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations

· Adjust the fan speed · Turn off Eco drive mode

Ventilation and air conditioning odors

To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring:

· It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
· The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

P. 530

Customization

Settings (e.g. A/C automatic mode switch operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 639)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

439

WARNING

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

To prevent burns Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on. Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE 6
Humidity sensor In order to detect fog on the windshield, a sensor which monitors the temperature of the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is installed. (P. 438) Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor: Do not disassemble the sensor Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sensor or subject it to strong impacts Do not stick anything on the sensor
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

440 6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
WARNING
Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on: · Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged · Persons with sensitive skin · Persons who are fatigued · Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Observe the following precautions to prevent minor burns or overheating: · Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater. · Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the functions when the hybrid system is off.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

441

Heated steering wheel
Turns the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

Operation condition The heated steering wheel can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.
Timer The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.

Seat heaters

Vehicles without seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The level indicator (amber) light up during operation.

Level

indicator

Vehicles with seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The indicator (amber) and level indicator (green) light up during operation.

Level indicator

Operation condition The seat heaters can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

442

6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows. Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The indicator (green) and level indicator (green) light up during operation.

Level indicator

Operation condition The seat ventilators can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Interior lights list

6-2. Using the interior lights 443

Interior features

1 Outer foot lights

2 Personal lights (P. 444)

3 Front interior light (P. 444)

4 Rear interior light (P. 445)

5 Footwell lights
· When the power switch is in ON mode, the footwell lights will turn on. However, if the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the footwell lights will turn off. (P. 99)
· When shifting the shift lever is in a position other than P, the brightness of the footwell light will reduce intensity.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

444 6-2. Using the interior lights Front interior light
Turns the light on/off (touch the light)
The rear interior light also turns on/off. However, when the rear interior light has already been turned on, it will not be controlled by front interior light operations.
Turns the door position on/off 1 On
The front and rear interior lights turn on/ off when a door is opened/closed.
2 Off
Personal lights
Turns the lights on/off (touch the lights)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Rear interior light
Turns the light on/off
The rear interior light is also turned on/ off by the front interior light operations. If the light is turned on by front interior light operation, the rear interior light cannot turn off by pressing the switch.

6-2. Using the interior lights

445

Illuminated entry system: The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.
If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
In the following cases, the front interior lights and personal lights may not respond as normal. · When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to the lens surface · When operated with a wet hand · When wearing gloves, etc.
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 637)

NOTICE

Never remove the lens for the front interior light and personal lights. Otherwise, the lights will be damaged. If the lens need to remove, contact your Lexus dealer.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

446 6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features

1 Glove box (P. 447) 2 Bottle holders (P. 448) 3 Console box (P. 447)
WARNING

4 Cup holders (P. 448) 5 Sunglass holder (P. 449)

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: · Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. · Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.
When driving or when the glove box and the console box are not in use, keep it closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Glove box
1 Open (press the button) 2 Unlock with the mechanical key 3 Lock with the mechanical key

6-3. Using the storage features

447

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
Console box
1 Lift the lid while pushing the button to release the lock.

6
2 Vehicles with the wireless charger: Lift the wireless charger.

Interior features

Vehicles without the wireless charger: The tray slides forward/backward and can be removed.
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on. NX300h_U_OM78007U

448 6-3. Using the storage features
Cup holders/bottle holders
Cup holders Front

Rear

Bottle holders Front

Fold down the armrest and release the button.
Rear

When storing a bottle, close the cap. The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
WARNING
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-3. Using the storage features 449
NOTICE To prevent damage to the rear cup holder, stow the cup holder before stowing the
armrest. Do not place open bottles or glass and paper cups containing liquid in the bottle hold-
ers. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Sunglass holder

Remove the lid using the strap.

Strap

The removed the lid of the sunglass holder can be stored on the tray in the console box. 6
The back side of the lid for the sunglass holder can be used as a vanity mirror. (P. 455) NOTICE
Do not rub magnetic cards, such as credit cards, or magnetic recording media, etc., or precision equipment against the sunglass holder. As magnets are used in the outlet vicinity, data may disappear under the influence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches, etc., close to the area, as such objects may break.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

450 6-3. Using the storage features
Luggage compartment features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.
WARNING To avoid injury, always return the hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.
Cargo net hooks
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo net can be hanged, using the hook.
WARNING To avoid injury, always return the hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Grocery bag hooks

6-3. Using the storage features

451

NOTICE Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
Deck under tray
Lift the deck board and attach the hook. (P. 452) The following item can be stowed. Vehicles with a compact spare tire Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
6

Interior features

1 First-aid kit and other items

3 Warning reflector*

2 Accessories
*: The warning reflector itself is not included as an original equipment.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

452 6-3. Using the storage features Deck board
1 If the luggage cover is used: Unhook the cords.
2 If the luggage cover is used: Fold up the luggage cover.
3 Pull the lever upwards and open the deck board.
4 Lift the deck board and remove the hook on the backside of the deck board.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-3. Using the storage features
5 Attach the hook to the upper edge of the back door opening as shown.

453

When attaching the side deck board, attach it so that the "FRONT" mark points to the front side of the vehicle.

WARNING

If the deck boards are opened or removed, return them to their original positions

before driving. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occu-

pant being struck by the deck boards or the items stored in the deck under tray.

Stowing the luggage cover
1 Unhook the cords.

2 Fold up the luggage cover.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

454 6-3. Using the storage features
3 Pull the lever upwards and open the deck board.
4 Remove the luggage cover.
When the seatback for the rear seat is collapsed to the rear, remove the cover after the cover most upright position. (P. 147)
5 Stow the luggage cover in the deck under tray while lifting the deck board.
WARNING Do not place anything on the luggage cover. In the event of sudden braking or turn-
ing, the item may go flying and strike an occupant. This could lead to an unexpected accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Other interior features

6-4. Other interior features 455

Sun visors
1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors
On the sun visors

On the sunglass holder

Strap

Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is opened.

Remove the lid of sunglasses holder using the strap. (P. 449)
There is a vanity mirror on the back side of the lid.

If the vanity lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vanity mirror, when the lid of sunglass holder is removed, do not subject it to strong impacts or set heavy objects on top of it.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

456 6-4. Other interior features
Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons. 1 Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands backward. 2 Pressing and holding will move the
clock hands forward.

Power outlet (12 VDC)

Please use a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC /10 A (power consumption of 120 W). When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption of all the connected power outlets is less than 120 W.

Inside the console box

In the luggage compartment

Open the lid.

The power outlet can be used when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode. The notch in console box allows power cables
to be passed through even when the console box is closed.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features 457
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Power outlet (120 VAC) (if equipped)
Please use a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 120 VAC (power consumption of 100 W). Open the lid.

The power outlet can be used when the power switch is in ON mode.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
To prevent blown fuse, do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100W: · Appliances with high initial peak wattage · Measuring devices that process precise data · Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

458 6-4. Other interior features Wireless charger (if equipped)
A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi standard wireless charge compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power Consortium, such as smart phones and mobile batteries, etc., on the charge area. This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger than the charging area. Also, depending on the portable device, it may not operate as normal. Please read the operation manual for portable devices to be used. The "Qi" symbol
The "Qi" symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.
Name for all parts 1 Power supply switch 2 Operation indicator light 3 Charge area
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features 459

Using the wireless charger 1 Open the console box. (P. 447)

2 Press the power supply switch of the wireless charger.

Switches on and off with each press of the power supply switch. When turned on, the operation indicator light (green) comes on. Even with the hybrid system off, the on/off state of the power supply switch is memorized.

3 Place the charging side of the portable device down.

When charging, the operation indicator light (orange) comes on.

If charging is not occurring, try placing the portable device as close to the center of the charging area as possible.

When charging is complete, the

operation indicator light (green)

comes on.

Recharging function

· When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge suspen-

sion state, charging restarts.

· When the portable device is moved, charging is stopped for a moment

and then it restarts.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

460 6-4. Other interior features
Lighting conditions of operation indicator light

Operation indicator light

Conditions

Turning off

When the Wireless charger power supply is off

Green (comes on)

On Standby (charging possible state)
When charging is complete*

Orange (comes on)

When placing the portable device on the charging area (detecting the portable device) Charging

*: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation indicator
light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is complete.
When the operation indicator light flashes
When an error occurs, the operation indicator light flashes an orange color. Handle the error based on the following table.

Operation indicator light

Suspected causes

Handling method

Flashing repeatedly once every second (Orange)

Vehicle to charger communication failure.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

Repeatedly

flashes

3 times continuously

A foreign substance is between the portable device and charge area.

Remove the foreign substance from between portable device and the charge area.

(Orange)

The portable device is out of Place the portable device

sync due to the device being near the center of the

shifted from its position.

charge area.

Repeatedly

flashes

4 times continuously

(Orange)

Temperature rising the wireless charger.

within

Stop charging at once and start charging again after for a while.

The wireless charger can be operated when The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
Usable portable devices Qi standard wireless charge standard can be used on compatible devices. However, not all Qi standard devices and compatibility are guaranteed. Starting with mobile phones and smart phones, it is aimed for low power electrically supplied portable devices of no more than 5W.
When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle Qi are attached to the portable device. Depending on the type of cover and accessory, it may not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed even with the portable device placed on the charge area, remove the cover and accessories.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features

461

While charging, noise enters the AM radio Turn off the wireless charger and confirm that the noise has decreased. If the noise decreases, continuously pushing the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2 seconds, the frequency of the charger can be changed and the noise can be reduced. Also, on that occasion, the operation indicator light will flash orange 2 times.
Important points of the wireless charger If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle interior, charging cannot be done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily suspended. When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get warmer, however this is not a malfunction. When a portable device gets warm while charging, charging may stop due to the protection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the temperature of the portable device drops significantly, charge again.
Operation sounds When the power supply is turned on, while searching for the portable device a sound will be produced, however this is not a malfunction.
Certification for the wireless charger FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

462 6-4. Other interior features
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features 463
WARNING Caution while driving
When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the main the part of the portable device while driving. Caution regarding interference with electronic devices People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapypacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger. The operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices. To prevent damage or burns Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in a possibility of equipment failure and damage, catch fire, burns due to overheat. Do not insert any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device
while charging Do not attach stickers, metallic objects, etc., to the charger area or portable device Do not cover with cloth, etc., and charge Do not charge portable devices other than designated Do not attempt to dismantle for disassembly or modifications Do not hit or apply a strong force
6
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Interior features

464 6-4. Other interior features
WARNING Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly
In the following conditions, it may not operate correctly The portable device is fully charged There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device The temperature of the portable device gets higher from charging The charging surface of the portable device is facing up The placement of the portable device is out of alignment with the charge area Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport
or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects · Cards to which aluminum foil is attached · Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside · Metallic wallets or bags · Coins · Hand warmers made of metal · Media such as CDs and DVDs When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby In addition, excluding the above-mentioned, when the charger does not perform normally or the operation display lamp is flashing continuously, it is considered that the wireless charger is malfunctioning. Contact your Lexus dealer. To prevent failure or damage to data Do not bring magnetic cards, such as credit cards, or magnetic recording media, etc., close to the charger while charging, otherwise, data may disappear under the influence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches, etc., close to the charger, as such objects may break. Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may become high, when under the sun, and cause damage to the device. To prevent 12-volt battery discharge When the hybrid system is stopped, do not use the wireless charger for a long time.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.

6-4. Other interior features 465

NOTICE To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.
6
WARNING Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.
NOTICE To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

466 6-4. Other interior features Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.
WARNING Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Garage door opener

6-4. Other interior features 467

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

HomeLink®
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device. 1 HomeLink® indicator light
2 Garage door operation indicators
3 Buttons

6
Before programming the HomeLink®
During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

468 6-4. Other interior features
Programming HomeLink® 1 Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes orange.
Perform 3 within 60 seconds of 1 , or the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.
2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.
For U.S.A. owners 3 Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button. Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market 3 Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code). 4 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light: Device with fixed code: If the indicator light is solid/continuous, pro-
gramming has been completed and your garage door or other device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. Device with rolling code: If the indicator light flashes rapidly, your garage door opener motor (or other device) is equipped with a rolling code. Complete the programming process by firmly pressing and holding the programmed HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and then release the button.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features 469
If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to "Programming a rolling code system".
5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
Programming a rolling code system 1 Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the Owner's manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button. Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2 .
6
3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the HomeLink® signal.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Interior features

470 6-4. Other interior features
Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices) When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle. 2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.) 1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled. If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed. 2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door. 3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten: 1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. 2 When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing orange, continue to hold the HomeLink® button and perform "Programming HomeLink®" 1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).
Operating the HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light should turn on.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features

471

Garage door operation indicators

The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

1 Opening 2 Closing

This function is only available if the

garage door opener motor used is a

compatible device. (To check device

compatibility,

refer

www.HomeLink.com.)

Color

Orange (flashing)

Green

Red (flashing)

Status Currently opening/closing Opening/closing has completed Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the

garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and

the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door

may not be received.

To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either

HomeLink® buttons

and

simultaneously.

The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously lit orange to rapidly flashing green.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

472

6-4. Other interior features

Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected. If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.
Before programming Install a new battery in the transmitter. The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.
Certification for the garage door opener For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NZLAECHL5 NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. REMARQUE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
When support is necessary Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
When operating or programming HomeLink® Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Compass

6-4. Other interior features 473

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

Operation
To turn the compass on or off, press the button for more than 3 seconds.

Displays and directions
Display "N" "NE" "E" "SE" "S" "SW" "W" "NW"

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

474 6-4. Other interior features Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth's magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to "Deviation calibration".
Deviation calibration 1 Stop the vehicle. 2 Press and hold the button for 6 seconds. A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.
3 Referring to the map above, press the button to select the number of the zone you are in.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features
Circling calibration 1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle. 2 Press and hold the button for 9 seconds.
"C" appears on the compass display.

475

3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until a direction is displayed.

Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

The 12-volt battery has been disconnected.

A door is open.

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

476 6-4. Other interior features
WARNING While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction. To ensure normal operation of the compass Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.)
as they may interfere with the calibration.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Safety Connect

6-4. Other interior features

477

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus' designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such thenapplicable Terms and Conditions.

System components

1 Microphone

2 "SOS" button

3 LED light indicators

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

: If equipped

478 6-4. Other interior features Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 480)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 480)
Emergency Assistance Button (SOS) Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 480)
Enhanced Roadside Assistance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 480)
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the "SOS" button in your vehicle for further subscription details.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features 479
Safety Connect Services Information Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect. Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected. Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada. Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
Languages The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
When contacting the response center You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light comes on 6 for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active. The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions: Green indicator light on = Active service Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact
your Lexus dealer) No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Interior features

480 6-4. Other interior features
Safety Connect services
Automatic Collision Notification In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle's location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.
Stolen Vehicle Location If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS") In the event of an emergency on the road, push the "SOS" button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle's location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the "SOS" button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.
Enhanced Roadside Assistance Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service. Subscribers can press the "SOS" button to reach a Safety Connect responsecenter agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

6-4. Other interior features

481

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of

the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physi-

cians from universities, and government health agencies and industries

reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101 FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B FCC ID: N7NGTM2 FCC WARNING: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Interior features

NX300h_U_OM78007U

482 6-4. Other interior features
NX300h_U_OM78007U

483
7 Maintenance and care
7-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.................484 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior................. 488
7-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements.............................. 491 General maintenance.............. 494 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs .....................................497
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions................................498 Hood .............................................. 500 Positioning a floor jack.............. 501 Engine compartment ...............502 12-volt battery............................... 512 Tires................................................... 516 Tire inflation pressure ...............525 Wheels ...........................................528 Air conditioning filter ...............530 Electronic key battery..............532 Checking and replacing fuses..............................................534 Light bulbs.....................................538
NX300h_U_OM78007U

484 7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water. Wipe away any water. Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
Self-restoring coat The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches caused in a car wash etc. The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years after the coating has been performed. The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature. The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying warm water. Deep scratches caused by keys or coins cannot be restored. Do not use wax that contain abrasives.
Automatic car washes Before washing the vehicle: · Fold the mirrors · Turn off the power back door (if equipped) Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Extend the mirrors before driving. Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint. Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.
High pressure car washes Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-1. Maintenance and care 485
Note for a smart access system with push-button start If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.) If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors. Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 141)
Aluminum wheels Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather. Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Bumpers Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Front side windows water-repellent coating (vehicles with water-repellent coating) The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating. · Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly. · Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period. Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible. · Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows. · Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up. When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer. 7
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

486 7-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may oper-

ate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other

Off

serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper

blades.

When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand
When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor If something bumps against the windshield If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop
sensor Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. Precautions regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped) If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-1. Maintenance and care 487

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

· After driving near the sea coast · After driving on salted roads · If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface · If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface · After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron pow-
der or chemical substances · If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud · If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

Cleaning the exterior lights

Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to the off position.

If the wiper switch is in "AUTO", the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be

damaged.

When using a high pressure car wash

When washing the vehicle, do not let water of the high pressure washer hit directly or the vicinity of the camera. Due to the shock from the high pressure water, it is possible the device may not operate as normal.

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to following parts and boots (Rubber or resin manufactured cover), or connectors. Parts may be damages if they come into contact with high pressure water.

· Traction battery related parts · Steering parts · Suspension parts · Brake parts

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

488 7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted
detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off
the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-1. Maintenance and care 489

Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
Front side windows with UV protective coating The front side windows have UV protective coating. To prevent any damage to the UV protective coating, observe the following: If the windows are dirty, gently wipe them with a cloth soaked in water or lukewarm water as soon as possible. If the windows are very dirty, do not open and close them repeatedly.
WARNING

Water in the vehicle

Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the luggage compartment. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 42)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,

resulting in death or serious injury.

Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

490 7-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces: · Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach · Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces: Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately. Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LDA [Lane Departure Alert] or Automatic High Beam) Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (P. 270). If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LDA and Automatic High Beam may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction.
Cleaning the inside of the rear window Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
Cleaning the front side windows Do not use any compound or abrasive product (e.g., glass cleaner, detergent, wax) to clean the windows. It may damage the coating.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance requirements

7-2. Maintenance

491

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Warranty and Service Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate "Owner's Guide", "Warranty and Service Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Warranty Booklet".
7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

492 7-2. Maintenance

Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only) After the required maintenance is preformed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message. To reset the message, follow the procedures described below:

1 Press

of the meter control switch.

2 Press select

or of the meter control switch, , and then press .

3 Press or of the meter control switch, select the "Scheduled Maintenance" screen and then press and hold the .
4 Select the "Yes" and push .

NX300h_U_OM78007U

5 A message is displayed on the multi-information display.

7-2. Maintenance 493

WARNING
If your vehicle is not properly maintained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
Handling of the 12-volt battery Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 512)
7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

494 7-2. Maintenance
General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Warranty and Service Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Check points

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?

(P. 510)

Engine/power control coolant

unit

Is the engine coolant at the correct level?

(P. 508)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

(P. 504)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser should be free from

foreign objects.

(P. 509)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

(P. 511)

Luggage compartment

Items 12-volt battery

Check points Check the connections.

(P. 512)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-2. Maintenance 495

Vehicle interior

Items

Check points

Accelerator pedal

· The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Brake pedal

· Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

· Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance

from the floor?

(P. 614)

· Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of

free play?

(P. 614)

Brakes

· The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.
· The brakes should work effectively. · The brake pedal should not feel spongy. · The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor
when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints

· Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

Hybrid transmission "Park" · When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is

mechanism

the vehicle securely stopped?

Indicators/buzzers

· Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights

· Do all the lights come on?

Parking brake Seat belts

· Does the parking brake switch operate normally?

· When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on,

is the vehicle securely stopped?

· Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

· The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

· Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

· Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly? · Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of
free play? · There should not be any strange sounds coming
from the steering wheel.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

496 7-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items Doors Engine hood Fluid leaks
Tires
Windshield wipers/ rear window wiper

Check points · Do the doors operate smoothly? · Does the engine hood lock system work properly? · There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after
the vehicle has been parked. · Is the tire inflation pressure correct? · The tires should not be damaged or excessively
worn. · Have the tires been rotated according to the mainte-
nance schedule? · The wheel nuts should not be loose. · The wiper blades should not show any signs of crack-
ing, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation. · The wiper blades should clear the windshield/rear
window without streaking or skipping.

WARNING
If the hybrid system is operating Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-2. Maintenance 497
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driv-

ing trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven

40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

498 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items

Parts and tools

12-volt battery con- · Grease

dition (P. 512)

· Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level (P. 510)

· FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid · Rag or paper towel · Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

· "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Engine/power control unit coolant level (P. 508)

For the U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

· Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Engine oil level (P. 504)

· "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent · Rag or paper towel · Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (P. 534) · Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs (P. 538)

· Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original · Phillips-head screwdriver · Flathead screwdriver · Wrench

Radiator and condenser (P. 509)

Tire inflation pressure (P. 525)

· Tire pressure gauge

· Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 511)

· Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) · Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 499
WARNING The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. When working on the engine compartment
Make sure that the indicator on the power switch and the "READY" indicator are both off.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc.
right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment. Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flamma-
ble. When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is off. With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 509) Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt 7 in the air.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

500 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. 1 Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
WARNING Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

501

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely. When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front

Rear
1 Before raising your vehicle with a floor jack: Remove the cover. 1 Remove the bolt 2 Remove the cover
7
2 Raising your vehicle with a floor jack.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

502 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment

1 Fuse box

(P. 534) 6 Radiator

(P. 509)

2 Engine coolant reservoir

7 Condenser

(P. 509)

(P. 508) 8 Electric cooling fans

3 Engine oil filler cap (P. 505) 9 Engine oil level dipstick

4 Power control unit coolant reservoir

(P. 504)

(P. 508) 10 Washer fluid tank

(P. 511)

5 Brake fluid reservoir (P. 510)

12-volt battery P. 512

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
Removing the engine compartment cover

503

Installing the clips 1 Insert 2 Press

NOTICE

After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

504 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully with its protruding areas ( 1 in the illustration) pointing towards engine.

5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

1 Low 2 Normal

Measuring side

3 Excessive

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

505

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection Oil quantity (Low Full) Items

P. 612 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.) Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,

oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil

maintenance intervals.

When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

506 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

After changing the engine oil The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

1 Press

of the meter control switch.

2 Press select

or of the meter control switch, , and then press .

3 Press or of the meter control switch, select the "Oil Maintenance" screen and then press and hold the .
4 Select the "Yes" and push .

5 A message is displayed on the multi-information display.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 507
WARNING Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
7
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

508 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold. Engine coolant reservoir
1 Reservoir cap 2 "FULL" line 3 "LOW" line
If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (P. 600)
Power control unit coolant reservoir 1 Reservoir cap 2 "FULL" line 3 "LOW" line
If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.
Coolant selection Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C]) Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 509
WARNING When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE
When adding coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

When the electric cooling fans are operating

Do not touch the engine compartment. With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the power switch is off when working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

510

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid
Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.

Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Clean funnel

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
WARNING
When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE
If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

511

Washer fluid
If none of the washer do not work or the "Windshield Washer Fluid Low" on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

WARNING
When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. 7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

512

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

12-volt battery

Location
The 12-volt battery is located in the left-hand side of luggage compartment.

Removing the 12-volt battery maintenance cover
1 Lift the deck board and attach the hook. (P. 452) 2 Remove the left side deck board.

3 Remove the cover after removing the chip.
1 Press
2 Pull out

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

513

Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. 1 Terminals 2 Hold-down clamp

Maintenance and care

Installing the 12-volt battery maintenance cover
Insert the left side auxiliary box. 1 Push up center position 2 Insert 3 Press

Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:

If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1 Shift the shift lever to P.

2 Open and close any of the doors.

3 Restart the hybrid system.

Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

514

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

Chemicals in the 12-volt battery The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
How to recharge the 12-volt battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

515

WARNING
When handling the 12-volt battery P. 599
When disconnecting the 12-volt battery Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body side as shown. The disconnected negative (-) terminal may touch the positive (+) terminal, which may cause a short and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

516

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires
1 New tread 2 Treadwear indicator 3 Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or "" marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires approximately at the following intervals:

2WD models: Every 6000 miles (10000 km)

AWD models: Every 3000 miles (5000 km)

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

Vehicles with compact spare tire

Vehicles with full-size spare tire

Front

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

517

Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by
a warning light. (P. 567)
The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display.

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 519)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum- 7 stances: When changing the tire inflation pressure When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight. When rotating the tires When changing the tire.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

518

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 615)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the power switch to ON mode.

4 Press trol switch.

of the meter con-

5 Press or of the meter con-

trol switch, select then press .

, and

6 Press or of the meter control switch, select the "TPMS" screen and then press and hold
the .

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

519

7 A message and an indicator are displayed by the multi-information display, and initialization is completed.

Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.

When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if:

You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage.

A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage.

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire

pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunc-

tion.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

520 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 621)
Tire types Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 326)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

521

Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

· If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. · A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire. · A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size. · Tire chains etc. are equipped. · Lock nuts are equipped. · An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped. · If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. · If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel
housings. · If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level. · If wheel without the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is used. · If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered
in the tire pressure warning computer. Performance may be affected in the following situations.

· Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
· When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

The initialization operation

Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not neces-

sary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.

If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.

Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

522

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Certification for tire pressure warning system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: PAXPMVC010 FCC ID: HYQ22AAA NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1). l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2). l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 523

WARNING

When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. Vehicles with a compact spare tire: Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.
When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not initializing tire inflation pressure without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization therapypacemak-

ers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators

should not come within 17.7 in. (450 mm) of

the tire pressure warning system initiators.

The radio waves may affect the operation of

such devices.

Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

524 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound. When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck. To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 517, 529) Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body. If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Tire inflation pressure

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 525

Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 615)

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

526 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Inspection and adjustment procedure
1 Tire valve 2 Tire pressure gauge
1 Remove the tire valve cap. 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pres-
sure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate. 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 6 Put the tire valve cap back on.
Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: Reduced fuel economy Reduced driving comfort and poor handling Reduced tire life due to wear Reduced safety Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

527

Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires Air leaking from between tire and wheel Wheel deformation and/or tire damage Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

528 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent
to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as "offset".
Lexus does not recommend using the following: Wheels of different sizes or types Used wheels Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber
hammer when balancing your wheels.
When replacing wheels The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 517, 529)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 529
WARNING When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
Use of defective wheels prohibited Do not use cracked or deformed wheels. Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident. NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
7
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

530 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1 Turn the power switch off. 2 Open the glove box. Slide off the
damper.
3 Push in the glove box on the vehicle's outer side to disconnect the claws. Then pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.
4 Remove the filter cover.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

531

5 Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.
The "UP" marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

532 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Flathead screwdriver Lithium battery CR2032
Replacing the battery
1 Take out the mechanical key.
2 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.
3 Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 533
Use a CR2032 lithium battery Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped) The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you.
If the electronic key battery is depleted The following symptoms may occur: The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
Removed battery and other parts These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

534 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Turn the power switch off. 2 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A fuse box

Engine compartment: type B fuse box

Push the tab in and lift the lid off. Left side instrument panel

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Remove the lid.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Luggage compartment

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 535

3 Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

536 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

1 Normal fuse

2 Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

After a fuse is replaced If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 538) If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
If there is an overload in a circuit The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
When replacing light bulbs Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, nongenuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 537
WARNING To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse. Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes. Fuse box near the power control unit Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring near the fuse box. Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
7
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

538 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 617)
Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 503
Canceling the power back door system
P. 132
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Bulb locations
Front

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 539

1 Front turn signal light (bulb type) 3 Front side marker light (bulb type) 2 Headlight high beam (halogen
bulbs)
7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

540 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear
1 Back-up light 2 Rear turn signal light
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

541

Replacing light bulbs
Headlight high beams (halogen bulbs) For the right side only:
1 Remove the bolt, and move the washer fluid supply opening.

When it is difficult to work, remove the washer fluid supply opening.
2 Turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it.
7
3 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

542 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4 Unplug the connector while pulling the lock release.
5 Confirm whether the O-ring of the cover has not come off.
If the O-ring come off, attached to the proper position.
6 Replace the light bulb, and set the connector
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7 Install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set.

543

8 Confirm the installation of the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlight high beams on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.
7
9 Install the cover and turn it clockwise.
Align the of the cover to the positioning mark of the lamp body and insert and turn it.
There is the positioning mark on the outer side of the light unit.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

544 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
10 When removing the washer fluid supply opening: Installing the washer fluid supply opening.
Align the washer tank with the washer fluid opening position.
11 Fix the washer fluid supply opening. 1 Align the tab position and install washer fluid opening. 2 Fasten the bolt.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Front side marker light (bulb type) 1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

545

2 Remove the light bulb.

3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

Front turn signal lights (bulb type)

1 Open the hood and remove the cover for engine compartment cover. (P. 500, 503)

2 Remove the cover. 1 Push the center of the clip.

2 Remove the clip and cover.

3 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

546 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4 Remove the light bulb.
5 Replace the light bulb.
6 Turn clockwise and set the bulb base.
7 Attach the clip to the cover. 1 Push up on the center of the clip. 2 Attach the clip.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 547
8 Attach the cover. 1 Align the 2 tabs positions and close the cover. 2 Fix the cover by pushing the center of the clip.
9 Install the engine compartment cover. (P. 503) Rear turn signal lights
1 Open the back door and attach protective tape around the lamp body. (Use masking tape, do not use Duct tape, as duct tape may leave markings.)
2 Remove the cover.
It is recommended for safeguarding to wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a cloth, etc., in order to prevent scratches to the vehicle.
7
3 Remove the 2 bolts.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

548 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4 Remove the light unit. 1 Attach 2 long pieces of the masking tape and fold the excess portion over in half. 2 Hold the section folded in half, pull toward the rear of the lens and remove.
5 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
6 Remove the light bulb.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

73 Replace the light bulb.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 549

83 Turn clockwise and set the bulb base.
Confirm that cable is fixed to the tab.
Tab

9 Set the light unit.

1 Align the light unit with the 2 tabs on the rear bumper.

2 Push the light unit forward while pushing A.

Confirm that the grommet fits into

the bolt installation hole on the light unit.

Tab

A Grommet

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

550 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
10 Install the 2 bolts.
11 Install the cover.
Back-up lights 1 Open the back door and remove the cover.
Press down on the notch on the cover and remove the cover. It is recommended for safeguarding to wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a cloth, etc., in order to prevent scratches to the vehicle.
2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

3 Remove the light bulb.

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

551

4 Replace the light bulb, and install the bulb base.
5 Install the back door cover
Align the 2 tabs on the cover and install.
7

Maintenance and care

NX300h_U_OM78007U

552 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing the following bulbs If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. Headlight low beams Headlight high beams (LED type) Front turn signal lights (LED type) Parking lights and Daytime running lights Front fog lights Front side marker lights (LED type) Side turn signal lights Stop/tail lights Rear side marker lights High mounted stoplight License plate lights Outer foot lights
After replacing the bulbs After removing the engine compartment cover, return the cover to original position with the clips. 1 Insert 2 Press
LED lights The headlight low beams, headlight high beams (LED Type), front turn signal lights (LED Type), parking lights, daytime running lights, front fog lights, front side marker lights (LED Type), side turn signal lights, rear side marker lights, stop/tail lights, rear side marker lights, high mounted stoplight and license plate lights, outer foot lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations: Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens. Water has built up inside the headlight.
When replacing light bulbs P. 536
NX300h_U_OM78007U

7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 553
WARNING Replacing light bulbs
Be sure to stop the hybrid system and turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits or component parts. Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
7
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Maintenance and care

554 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NX300h_U_OM78007U

555
8 When trouble arises
8-1. Essential information Emergency flashers ..................556 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency................................. 557
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle needs to be towed .....................................558 If you think something is wrong ........................................... 564 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds..........................................565 If a warning message is displayed..................................... 572 If you have a flat tire................... 575 If the hybrid system will not start ...............................................589 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............................. 591 If the electronic key does not operate properly ..................... 592 If the 12-volt battery is discharged .................................595 If your vehicle overheats ........ 600 If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................................604
NX300h_U_OM78007U

556 8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc. Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.
Emergency flashers If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the "READY" indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-1. Essential information 557
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure: 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N. If the shift lever is shifted to N 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. 4 Stop the hybrid system. If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as
much as possible. 4 To stop the hybrid system, press and
hold the power switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more 5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
8 WARNING If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

When trouble arises

558 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. 2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (P. 559, 562) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck. AWD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (P. 559, 562)
Situations needs to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing. (P. 562) The hybrid warning message shows on and the vehicle does not move. The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 559

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front (2WD models)

From the front (AWD models)

Release the parking brake. From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
8

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

560 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.
Front
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

561

Installing towing eyelets
1 Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 576) 2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flat-
head screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

When trouble arises

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.
8
5 Securely attach a cable or chain to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the power switch to ON mode.
7 Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 591 While towing
If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, marking steering and braking more difficult. Wheel nut wrench Wheel nut wrench is installed in luggage compartment. (P. 576)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

562 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. When transporting the vehicle
2WD models Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction. AWD models Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck, or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction.
While towing When towing using a cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing hook and rope. The towing hook or rope may become damaged, broken debris may hit people and cause serious damage. Do not turn the power switch off. There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 563
NOTICE To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck (2WD
models) When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc) Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the Hybrid AWD system (AWD models) and transmission. (P. 200)
8
NX300h_U_OM78007U

When trouble arises

564 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than nor-
mal
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound Excessive tire squeal when cornering Strange noises related to the suspension system Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
Operational symptoms
Engine misfire or misses, stumbling or running roughly Appreciable loss of power Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 565
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
*1

Brake system warning light Indicates that: · The brake fluid level is low; or · The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Low engine oil pressure warning light (warning buzzer) Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

High coolant temperature warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates that the engine is overheating

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Handling method (P. 600)

Brake system warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The regenerative braking system; · The electronically controlled brake system; or · The electric parking brake
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.) (Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: · The hybrid system; · The electronic engine control system; · The electronic throttle control system; or · The emission control system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

566 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The SRS airbag system; · The front passenger occupant classification system; or · The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.) (Canada) (Flashes) (If equipped)
(Flashes)

ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The ABS; or · The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. PCS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning: · The light will come on when the TRAC and VSC systems are
turned off. (P. 307) · The light will come on when the pre-collision system is turned off.
(P. 311) · The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be used. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Slip indicator light Indicates a malfunction in: · The VSC system; · The TRAC system; or · The hill-start assist control system The light will flash when the ABS, VSC or TRAC system is operating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Brake hold operated indicator Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(Flashes) (U.S.A.) (Flashes) (Canada)

Parking brake indicator It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released
Operate the parking brake switch once again. This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 567

Warning light

Warning light/Details/Actions

Low fuel level warning light Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2 gal. (8.4 L, 1.8 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning
buzzer)*2
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
P. 572

Tire pressure warning light When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as · Natural causes (P. 569) · Flat tire (P. 575)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system (P. 569) Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control warning light

Indicates that: · The Brake Override System is operating;

· The Brake Override System is malfunctioning (with warning

buzzer);

· The Drive-Start Control is operating (with warning buzzer); or

· The Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning (with warning buzzer)

Follow the instruction that are displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

568 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency *1: This light illuminates on the multi-information display. *2: Driver's and front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. The front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. SRS warning light This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), "AIR BAG ON" indicator light, "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, driver's seat belt pretensioner, front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 40) Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer) When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient of the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound. If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The light will go off after several driving trips. If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 569

When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Inspect the appearance of the tire to check that the tire is not punctured.

If the tire is punctured: P. 575

If the tire is not punctured:

Carry out the following procedure after the tire temperature has lowered sufficiently.

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

If the warning light does not go out even after several minutes, check that the tire inflation pressure is at the specified level and carry out initialization. (P. 518)

The warning light may come on again if the above operations are conducted without first allowing the tire temperature to lower sufficiently.

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

Vehicles with a compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: The spare tire is also equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

P. 521

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the

power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

570 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. When the electric power steering system warning light comes on When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual. If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately. If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

571

WARNING

Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function

properly.

NOTICE
To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

572 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

1 Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
2 Multi-information display
3 Handling Method
Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

Messages and warnings

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Comes on
Flashes

System warning
light Comes on or flashes

Warning buzzer*

Warning

Sounds Sounds Sounds

Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed Indicates an important situation, such as when the systems shown on the multi-information display may be malfunctioning Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 573

System warning
light

Warning buzzer*

Warning

Comes on

Does not sound

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance

Flashes

Does not sound

Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

System warning lights The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases. Instead, a separate system warning light will come on along with a message shown on the multi-information display. Malfunction of the ABS The ABS warning light comes on. (P. 566) Malfunction of the charging system The charging system warning light comes on. (P. 565)
If "Hybrid System Overheated Reduced Output Power" is shown This message may be displayed when driving under severe operating conditions. (For example, when driving up a long steep hill.) Handling method: P. 600
If "Cooling Performance of The Hybrid Battery Is Low" is shown The filter may be clogged, or the air intake vents or ducts may be blocked. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
If "Hybrid Battery Low Shift Out of N to Recharge" is shown Message is displayed when the remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) 8 is low. As the hybrid battery (traction battery) can not be charged when the shift lever is in N, when stopped for long periods of time shift the shift lever to P.
If "Hybrid Battery Low Hybrid System Stopped Shift to P and Restart" is shown Message is displayed when the remaining charge for the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low, because vehicle has been shifted N for a long period of time. When operating the vehicle, restart the hybrid system.
If "Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle" is shown Message is displayed when the driver's door is opened without turning the power switch to OFF with the shift lever in any position other than P. Shift the shift lever to P.
If "Shift Is in N Release Accelerator Before Shifting" is shown Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal has been depressed and the shift lever is in N. Release the accelerator pedal and shift the shift lever to D or R.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

574 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If "Depress Brake When Vehicle Is Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat" is shown Message is displayed when the accelerator pedal is depressed to maintain the vehicle position when stopped on a upward slope, etc. If this continues, the hybrid system may overheat. Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
If "Oil Maintenance Required Soon" is shown Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.) Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. After changing the engine oil, the oil change system should be reset. (P. 506)
If "Oil Maintenance Required" is shown Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (After the engine oil is changed and the oil maintenance data has been reset.) Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the engine oil, the oil change system should be reset. (P. 506)
If "See Owner's Manual" is shown If the following messages are shown, following the instructions, accordingly. · "Engine Coolant Temp High" (P. 600) If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. · "Hybrid System Malfunction" · "Check Engine" · "Hybrid Battery System Malfunction" · "Accelerator System Malfunction" · "Braking Power Low" · "Smart Access System Malfunction" If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. · "Low Oil Pressure" · "Charging System Malfunction"
Warning buzzer P. 569 NOTICE
"High Power Consumption Partial Limit On AC/Heater Operation" is frequently shown There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the 12-volt battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

If you have a flat tire

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 575

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire. For details about tires: P. 516

WARNING
If you have a flat tire Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. Set the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to P. Stop the hybrid system. Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 556)

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

576 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicle with compact spare tire
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Vehicle with full-size spare tire

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

577

1 Jack handle 2 Wheel nut wrench 3 Towing eyelet

4 Spare tire 5 Jack 6 Screwdriver

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

578 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains. Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. Put the jack properly in its jack point. Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack. Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
1 If the luggage cover is used: Unhook the cords.

579

2 If the luggage cover is used: Fold up the luggage cover.

3 Pull the lever upwards and open the deck board.
8
4 Lift the deck board and remove the hook on the backside of the deck board.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

580 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
5 Attach the hook to the upper edge of the back door opening as shown.
6 Removing the Jack 1 Unclasp the hook and remove the jack. 2 Release the hook from the jack.
When stowing the jack, wind back the jack until it dose not move, fix the jack with the rubber band and then stow it.

Rubber band

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

581

Taking out the spare tire
1 Remove the deck under tray.

2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire When taking out the full-size spare tire, wear working gloves, firmly hold the spokes, and take out the tire with the proper posture.

Spokes

WARNING
When storing the spare tire Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

582 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
1 Chock the tires.

Flat tire

Wheel chock positions

Left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Front

Right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Rear

Right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4 Install the wheel nut wrench in jack handle.

583

5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

6 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

7 Remove the wheel ornament by

pushing from the reverse side.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

584 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury: · Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury. · Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. · Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. · Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. · When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. · If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. · Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door main switch (P. 132). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

585

2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Vehicle with compact spare tire

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Vehicle with full-size spare tire
Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel.
3 Install the wheel nut wrench in jack handle.

Disc wheel seat
Washer
8 Disc wheel

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

586 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4 Lower the vehicle.
5 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
6 Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: Reinstall the wheel ornament.
7 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
The compact spare tire (Vehicle with compact spare tire) The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency. Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 615)
After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 518)
When using the compact spare tire (Vehicle with compact spare tire) As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
When the compact spare tire is equipped (Vehicle with compact spare tire) The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 587

If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a compact spare tire and excluding the 225/60R18 tires) Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires: 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle. 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
WARNING

When using the compact spare tire (Vehicle with compact spare tire) Remember that the spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle. Do not use more than one spare tire simultaneously. Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
When the compact spare tire is attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

· ABS & Brake assist · VSC · TRAC · Cruise control · Dynamic radar cruise control
(if equipped) · Pre-collision system (if equipped) · EPS

· AVS (if equipped) · LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
(if equipped) · Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) · Navigation system (if equipped) · BSM (Blind spot monitor)
(if equipped) · Automatic high Beam (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even negatively affect the drive-train components:

E-Four (if equipped)

Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is

installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

After using the tools and jack Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

588 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehi-
cle The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 589
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (P. 201)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem: The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 592) There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank.
Refuel the vehicle. (P. 83) There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 86) There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such
as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (P. 590)
The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem: The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 595) The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
(P. 512)
8
NX300h_U_OM78007U

When trouble arises

590 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem: The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 595) One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. (P. 512)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally: Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency. 1 Set the parking brake. 2 Shift the shift lever to P. 3 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode. 4 Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

591

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
1 Set the parking brake. 2 Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode. 3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

5 Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed
8

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

592 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 142) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors
Use the mechanical key (P. 119) to perform the following operation Unlocking the door 1 Insert the mechanical key while pull-
ing on the driver's door handle.
2 Unlocking the door.
3 Remove the key, return the handle, and then pull the handle again.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Locking the door 1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

593

2 Close the door.

Key linked functions
1 Closes the windows and moon roof*
(turn and hold)
2 Opens the windows and moon roof*
(turn and hold)
*: These settings must be customized at your
Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.

Starting the hybrid system

1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the power switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a

buzzer sounds and the power switch will

turn to ON mode.

When the smart access system with

push-button start is deactivated in cus-

tomization setting, the power switch will

turn to ACCESSORY mode.

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that message shown on the multi-information display.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

594 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4 Press the power switch. In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer.
Stopping the hybrid system Set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.
Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 532)
Alarm (if equipped) Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered.
Changing power switch modes Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above. The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 202)
When the electronic key does not work properly Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on. (Customizable features P. 635) Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 142) WARNING
When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 595
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below. 1 Open the hood (P. 500) and fuse
box cover.

2 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.

3 Remove the engine cover.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

596 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
1 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle.
2 Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
3 Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 597
5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch off.
7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.
8 Make sure the "READY" indicator comes on. If the indicator light does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
9 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
10 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.

Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle

is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appli-

ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the

hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while

the hybrid system is operating.)

When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off. If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

The power back door must be initialized. (P. 134)

Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated. (P. 88)

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

598 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When exchanging the 12-volt battery Use a Central Degassing type 12-volt battery (European Regulations). Also, use 12-volt batteries with case sizes similar to one prior the exchange and an equivalent 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater.

· If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery can not be properly secured. · If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not
used is a short time, the 12-volt battery may discharge and hybrid system may not be able to start. After exchanging, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the 12-volt battery.

· Use the exhaust hose that was attached to the 12-volt battery before exchanging and confirm that it is firmly connected to the hole section of the vehicle.
· Use the exhaust hole plug included with the 12-volt battery exchanged or the one installed on the battery prior to the exchange. (Depending on the 12-volt battery to be exchanged, the exhaust hole may be plugged.)

Exhaust hole plug
Hole section of the vehicle

Exhaust hole

Exhaust hose

For details, consult your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery: Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal. Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the "+" terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 599
WARNING 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not
to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery. After recharging the 12-volt battery Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers. When exchanging the 12-volt battery After exchanging, securely attach the exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to the exhaust hole of the exchanged 12-volt battery. If not properly installed, gases (hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and exploding.
NOTICE When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the 8 cooling fans or belt. To prevent damaging the vehicle The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

When trouble arises

600 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating. The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 97) enters the red zone, or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.) "Engine Coolant Temp High" or "Hybrid System Overheated" is shown on the multi-information display. Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
"Engine Coolant Temp High" is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system. 2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 1 Radiator 2 Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency

601

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir.
1 Reservoir 2 "FULL" line 3 "LOW" line

5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

6 Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

7 If the fans are not operating:

Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
8 Check if "Engine Coolant Temp High" is shown on the multi-information display.

If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Lexus dealer.

If the message is not displayed: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

602 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If "Hybrid System Overheated" is shown on the multi-information display 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place. 2 Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood. 3 After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 1 Radiator 2 Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir. 1 Reservoir 2 "FULL" line 3 "LOW" line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 603
6 Start the hybrid system and check if "Hybrid System Overheated" is shown on the multi-information display. If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Lexus dealer. If the message is not displayed: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
WARNING
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns. If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot. After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that the "READY" indicator are off. When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury. Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

Do not use any coolant additive.

When trouble arises

NX300h_U_OM78007U

604 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1 Stop the hybrid system. Shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the hybrid system.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R, release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press

to turn off TRAC. (P. 307)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

8-2. Steps to take in an emergency 605
WARNING When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE To avoid damage to the hybrid transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
8
NX300h_U_OM78007U

When trouble arises

606 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NX300h_U_OM78007U

607
9 Vehicle specifications
9-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.).................. 608 Fuel information........................... 618 Tire information.............................621
9-2. Customization Customizable features ............633
9-3. Initialization Items to initialize .........................643
NX300h_U_OM78007U

608 9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight
Overall length Overall width
Overall height*1
Wheelbase Front
Tread Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)
Trailer Weight Rating*2
(Trailer weight + cargo weight)
*1: Unladen vehicle *2: Vehicles with towing package

182.3 in. (4630 mm) 72.6 in. (1845 mm) 64.8 in. (1645 mm) 104.7 in. (2660 mm) 62.2 in. (1580 mm) 62.2 in. (1580 mm)
895 lb. (405 kg)
1500 lb. (685 kg)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications 609 Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
This number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat.
9
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Vehicle specifications

610

9-1. Specifications

Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine

Model Type Bore and stroke Displacement Valve clearance (engine cold) Drive belt tension

2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FXE) 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline 3.54 3.86 in. (90.0 98.0 mm) 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3) Automatic adjustment Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Octane Rating Fuel tank capacity (Reference)

Unleaded gasoline only 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher 14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)
Front

Type Maximum output Maximum torque

Permanent magnet synchronous motor 105 kW 199 ft·lbf (270 N·m, 27.5 kgf·m)

Rear (AWD models)

Type Maximum output Maximum torque

Permanent magnet synchronous motor 50 kW 103 ft·lbf (139 N·m, 14.2 kgf·m)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications

611

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Type Voltage Capacity Quantity Overall voltage

Nickel-Metal hydride battery 7.2 V/module 6.5 Ah (3HR) 34 modules 244.8 V

Lubrication system

Oil capacity (Drain and refill

reference*)

With filter Without filter

4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.) 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and
check the oil level on the dipstick.

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

612

9-1. Specifications

Engine oil selection
"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

· The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
· The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Cooling system

9-1. Specifications

613

Capacity*

Gasoline engine

Vehicles without towing package 7.7 qt. (7.3 L, 6.4 Imp.qt.) Vehicles with towing package 7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp.qt.)

Power control unit

3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following: · "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" · Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

*: The coolant capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

Ignition system (spark plug)

Make Gap

DENSO FK16HR-A8 0.03 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system

12-volt battery

Open voltage at 68F (20C):

12.6 V or higher: Fully charged 12.2 -- 12.4 V: Half charged 12.0 V or lower: Discharged (Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)

Charging rates

5 A max.

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

614

9-1. Specifications

Hybrid transmission

Fluid capacity*

Front 4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

Transmission fluid type Using transmission fluid other than "Toyota Genuine ATF WS" may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Rear differential (Rear electric motor) (AWD models)

Fluid capacity*

1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

Brakes

Pedal clearance*

4.13 in. (105 mm) Min.

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Pedal free play

0.04 -- 0.24 in. (1.0 -- 6.0 mm)

Fluid type

FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50.0 kgf)
while the hybrid system is operating.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Steering
Free play
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size Wheel nut torque
Type B
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size Wheel nut torque

9-1. Specifications

615

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

225/65R17 102H

Driving under normal conditions

Front

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h])

(in countries where such speeds are permitted by

law) Add

psi

(10

kPa,

0.1

kgf/cm2

bar)

the

front

and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold

tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire side-

wall.

17 7 J

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

225/60R18 100H

Driving under normal conditions

Front

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h])

(in countries where such speeds are permitted by 9

law) Add

psi

(60

kPa,

0.6

kgf/cm2

bar)

the

front and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum

cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire

sidewall.

18 7 1/2 J

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

616

9-1. Specifications

Compact spare tire

Tire size Spare tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Wheel size Wheel nut torque

T165/80D17 104M 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
17 4 T 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications

617

Light bulbs

Bulb No. W

Type

Headlights High beam

(halogen

bulbs)*

9005

Front side marker lights*

W5W

Exterior

Ftyrpoen)t* turn

signal

lights

(bulb

585 (WY21W)

Rear turn signal lights

585 (WY21W)

Back-up lights

921 (W16W)

Interior

Vanity lights Luggage compartment light

A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
D: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

618

9-1. Specifications

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
Gasoline quality standards Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide. The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits. All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program. Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications

619

Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

Consult your Lexus dealer.

You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

620 9-1. Specifications
NOTICE Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged. Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage. Fuel-related poor driveability If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Tire information
Typical tire symbols Full-size tire

9-1. Specifications

621

Compact spare tire
9

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

622

9-1. Specifications

1 Tire size

(P. 624)

2 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(P. 623)

3 Location of treadwear indicators

(P. 516)

4 Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
5 Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.
6 TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

7 Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 520)

8 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 615)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9 Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows.
10 Summer tires or all season tires

(P. 520)

An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.
11 "TEMPORARY USE ONLY"

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications 623 Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) 1 DOT symbol*
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN) 3 Tire manufacturer's identification
mark 4 Tire size code 5 Manufacturer's optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters) 6 Manufacturing week 7 Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
9
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Vehicle specifications

624 9-1. Specifications Tire size
Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. 1 Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) 2 Section width (millimeters) 3 Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) 4 Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) 5 Wheel diameter (inches) 6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
Tire dimensions 1 Section width 2 Tire height 3 Wheel diameter
NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications 625 Tire section names
1 Bead 2 Sidewall 3 Shoulder 4 Tread 5 Belt 6 Inner liner 7 Reinforcing rubber 8 Carcass 9 Rim lines 10 Bead wires 11 Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 9
NX300h_U_OM78007U

Vehicle specifications

626 9-1. Specifications
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-1. Specifications

627

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for Cold tire inflation pressure three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1
mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may

sure

be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manu-

pressure

facturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

Maximum weight

loaded

vehicle

(a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight i1n5t0helbs.e(6co8nkdgc)otilmumesntohef Tnaubmleb1e*rtohfaot cfoclulopwasnts specified

Occupant distribution

DthiisrdtricboultuiomnnooffoTcacbulepa1*ntbseinloawvehicle as specified in the

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

628 9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by dis-

Vehicle normal load on the tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory

tire

weight, and accordance

wnitohrmTaablleo1c*cbueplaonwt ),waenidghdtivi(ddiinsgtribbyuttwedo

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped

Bead

or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the

rim

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Tire related term Bead separation
Bias ply tire
Carcass Chunking Cord Cord separation Cracking
CT
Extra load tire Groove Innerliner Innerliner separation

9-1. Specifications 629
Meaning A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall The strands forming the plies in the tire The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire The space between two adjacent tread ribs The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

630 9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible infla- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may

tion pressure

be inflated

Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Tire related term Pneumatic tire
Radial ply tire Reinforced tire Section width Sidewall Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim Tread Tread rib

9-1. Specifications

631

Meaning A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands That portion of a tire between the tread and bead The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol( ) on at least one sidewall
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

632 9-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed Treadwear indicators (TWI) to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the
tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various des-
ignated seating capacities

Designated seating capac- Vehicle normal load, Num- Occupant distribution in a

ity, Number of occupants

ber of occupants

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat,

2 in third seat, 1 in fourth

seat

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Customizable features

9-2. Customization 633

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller, or at your Lexus dealer.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer.

Customizing vehicle features
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set. Changing using the Remote Touch
1 Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select "Setup" on the "MENU" screen and select "Vehicle". Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details. Changing using the Lexus Display Audio controller 1 Press the "MENU" button on the Lexus Display Audio controller. 2 Select "Setup" on the "MENU" screen and select "Vehicle". Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details. Changing using the multi-information display

1 Press or of the meter control switches, select

, and then

press .

2 Press or press .

of the meter control switches, select the item, and then

3 Press or of the meter control switches, select the desired setting, and then press .
To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press .

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

634 9-2. Customization

Customizable Features
1 Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch or Lexus Display Audio controller
2 Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display 3 Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer 4 Settings that can be changed using the vehicle switch Definition of symbols: O = Available, =Not available Door lock (P. 124, 592)

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 234

Driver's door

Unlocking using a mechanical key

unlocked in first step, all doors unlocked in

All

doors

unlocked in first

step

second step

Shift position

Off

Automatic door locking function

linked locking tion

door opera-

Speed linked door locking operation

Off

Shift position

Automatic door unlocking linked door Driver's door

function

unlocking oper- linked door

ation

unlocking oper-

ation

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-2. Customization 635

Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control (P. 124, 140)

Function Operation signal (emergency flashers) Operation buzzer volume

Default setting
On
5

Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked Open door reminder buzzer (When locking the vehicle)

60 seconds On

Customized setting

1 234

Off

Off 1 to 7 Off 30 seconds 120 seconds

OO OO

Off

Smart access system with push-button start (P. 140)

Function
The doors that are unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start can be selected Smart access system with push-button start Number of consecutive door lock operations

Default setting Driver's door
On 2 times

Customized

setting

1 234

All the doors O O O

Off As many as
desired

O O

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

636 9-2. Customization

Wireless remote control (P. 124)

Function

Default setting

Customized

setting

1 234

Wireless remote control

Off

Unlocking operation

Driver's door

unlocked in first All

doors

step, all doors unlocked in first O O

unlocked in step

second step

Panic function

Off

The function that validates the

switch of the wireless When locking When unlock-

remote control when locking the door

ing the door

the door (P. 129)

Automatic light control system (P. 219)

Function Light sensor sensitivity

Default setting Standard

Adjust the time elapsed before the headlights automatically turn off

30 seconds

Lights (P. 219)

Customized setting -2 to 2 Off
60 seconds 90 seconds

1 234
OO
OO

Function Daytime Running Lights (Daytime running lights can be disabled)

Default setting
On

Customized setting

1 234

Off

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Illumination (P. 443)
Function

Default setting

Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off

15 seconds

Time elapsed before the exterior lights turn off

15 seconds

Operation after the power switch is turned off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation when you

approach the vehicle with the

electronic key on your person

Footwell lighting

Fading out of the outer foot lights when they turn off

Long

9-2. Customization 637

Customized setting Off
7.5 seconds 30 seconds
Off 7.5 seconds 30 seconds

1 234
OO OO

Off

Off Off Short

O O O

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

638 9-2. Customization

Multi-information display (P. 97, 102)

Function

Default setting

Customized

setting

1 234

Changeover to tachometer when sport mode is selected

Auto

Hybrid system

indicator

(always)

Tachometer (always)

EV indicator

Off

Language*1

English

French Spanish

Units*1

miles (MPG Imperial) miles (MPG US) km (L/100km) O

km (km/L)

switch settings
Drive information screen displayed on the first screen of
(Drive information 1)

Drive information 1 Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption (after reset)

Desired status
screen*2

Drive information screen dis- Distance (range)

played on the second screen

of (Drive information 2)

Average speed (after reset)

Pop-up display*4

Off

Accent color

Color 1

Color 2

*1: The default setting varies according to countries. *2: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display) *3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehi-
cle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range),
distance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank
*4: Intersection guidance, Incoming calls, Adjust brightness

NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-2. Customization 639

Automatic air conditioning system (P. 430)

Function
Switching between outside air and recirculated air mode linked to "AUTO" switch operation A/C Auto switch operation

Default setting
On On

Customized

setting

1 234

Off

Eco drive mode (P. 303)

Function Heating/cooling operation minimized in Eco drive mode
Power windows (P. 166)

Default setting
On

Customized setting Off

1 234
O

Function
Mechanical key linked operation Wireless remote control linked open operation
Moon roof* (P. 169)

Default setting
Off Off

Customized setting On

1 234
O

Function
Mechanical key linked operation Wireless remote control linked open or Tilt up operations
*: If equipped

Default setting
Off
Off

Customized setting On

1 234
O

O 9

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

640 9-2. Customization

Intuitive parking assist (P. 279)

Function

Default setting

Detection distance of the front center sensor

Long

Detection distance of the rear center sensor

Long

Display setting (When intui-

tive parking assist is operat-

ing)

Buzzer volume

*: If equipped Driving position memory* (P. 154)

Customized

setting

1 234

Short

Off 1 to 5

OO OO

Function

Default setting

Driver's seat movement when exiting the vehicle

Standard

Selection the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Driver's door

*: If equipped
Outside rear view mirrors (P. 163)

Customized setting Off Partial

1 234
OO

All doors O

Function

Default setting

Customized setting

1 234

Linked mirror function when reversing

Off

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)* (P. 270)

Function
Steerage assist Sensitivity adjustment for the lane deviation alert buzzer
*: If equipped

Default setting
On
Standard

Customized setting Off
High

1 234
O O

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Power back door*1 (P. 129)

9-2. Customization

641

Function

Default setting

Customized

setting

1 234

Set at the desired Position
(height)*2
Back Door Automatic Open and Stop Position

Initial settings Position

Stop at the desired position
(height)

5 step configuration

Back Door Automatic

Open and Stop Position

1 to 5

Back door opener switch operations

When the back
door is locked*3

When the back door is unlocked

Power back door operations

Off

*1: If equipped

*2: Configured by operating the

switch of the lower back door. (P. 132

*3: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the back door opener switch.

Vehicle customization

When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking function are both on, the door lock operates as follows.

· When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked. · If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door locking func-
tion would not operate. · If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door locking func-
tion will operate. When the smart access system with push-button start is off, smart door unlocking can-
not be customized.

When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock function is activated, the signals will be generated in accordance with the Operation signal (buzzer) and the Operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.

In the following situations, customize mode in which the settings can be changed through the multi-information display will automatically be turned off.

A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is displayed.

The power switch is turned off.

The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is displayed.

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

642 9-2. Customization
WARNING Cautions during customization
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating while customizing features.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

9-2. Customization 643
9 NX300h_U_OM78007U

Vehicle specifications

Items to initialize

9-3. Initialization 643

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle.

Item

When to initialize

Message indicating mainte- · After the maintenance is pernance is required (U.S.A. only) formed

Tire pressure warning system

· When rotating the tires on vehicles with differing front and rear tire inflation pressures
· When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.
· When changing the tire size

Oil maintenance

· After the maintenance is performed

Power back door*

· After reconnecting or changing the 12-volt battery
· After changing a fuse

Power window
Moon roof*

· When functioning abnormally normally

*: If equipped

Reference P. 492
P. 518
P. 506 P. 134 P. 167 P. 170

Vehicle specifications

NX300h_U_OM78007U

644 9-3. Initialization
NX300h_U_OM78007U

645
For owners 10
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners............................................ 646
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ........ 647
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ........ 649
NX300h_U_OM78007U

646
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

647
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
Ne pas vriller la ceinture de sécurité.
Entretien et soin
Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Par ailleurs, vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
10
NX300h_U_OM78007U

For owners

648
AVERTISSEMENT
Respectez les précautions suivantes afin de réduire le risque de blessure en cas de freinage brusque, d'embardée ou d'accident. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre. Port de la ceinture de sécurité
Ne pas passer la sangle diagonale sous le bras. Faites toujours passer votre ceinture de sécurité au plus bas sur vos hanches et bien
dans l'axe. État et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant contre des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière Ne pas utiliser la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière avec une de ses deux boucles déverrouillée. Si une seule des boucles est verrouillée, tout freinage brusque ou collision peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

649
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
1 Coussins gonflables SRS conducteur/passager avant Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle
2 Coussin gonflable SRS de genoux Participe à la protection du conducteur
3 Coussin gonflable SRS d'assise de siège Participe à la retenue du passager avant
10
NX300h_U_OM78007U

For owners

650 Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
4 Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants des sièges avant
5 Coussins gonflables SRS rideau Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis
dans les sièges des places extérieures Peuvent empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du véhicule en cas de
retournement de celui-ci
NX300h_U_OM78007U

651 Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS

1 Coussin gonflable passager avant 10 Prétensionneurs et limiteurs

2 Témoins indicateurs "AIR BAG ON" d'effort de ceinture de sécurité

et "AIR BAG OFF"

11 Coussin gonflable d'assise de

3 Coussins gonflables latéraux

siège

4 Coussins gonflables rideau

12 Capteur de position du siège

5 Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière)

conducteur

6 Témoin d'alerte SRS

13 Coussin gonflable de genoux conducteur

Système de classification d'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur

8 Coussin gonflable conducteur 9 Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant)

15 Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant
16 Capteurs d'impact avant

17 Boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables

For owners

NX300h_U_OM78007U

652
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les informations reçues des capteurs, etc. détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus de composition du système pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables. Ces informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre. Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité. Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille: Sachant que la zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons: · Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre confortablement les pédales. · Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se trouve complètement vers l'avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l'arrière. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le. · Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d'orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et le cou. Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue des commandes au tableau de bord.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

653
AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles des ceintures de sièges avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux déterminent que le conducteur et le passager avant portent leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même qu'elle n'est pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux risquent de ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, causant des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité. Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit. Le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable peut infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux nourrissons et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants aux places arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant. N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur "AIR BAG OFF" est allumé. En cas d'accident, la force exercée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable passager avant peut causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles à un enfant, si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège passager avant.
10
NX300h_U_OM78007U

For owners

654
AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de bord.
Ne pas laisser un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant ni assis sur les genoux du passager avant.
Ne pas laisser les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.
Ne pas s'appuyer contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller sur le siège passager en appui contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS Ne rien fixer ou disposer sur la planche de bord, la garniture centrale du moyeu de volant de direction et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord. Lors du déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant et de genoux, tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile. Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de parebrise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

655

Ne pas suspendre aux crochets à vêtements un cintre nu ni aucun objet dur ou tranchant. En cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideau, tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le coussins gonflable SRS de genoux se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
N'utilisez pour les sièges aucun accessoire venant recouvrir les parties où se déploient les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et le coussin gonflable SRS d'assise de siège, car il risquerait de gêner le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et d'assise de siège de s'activer correctement, neutraliser le système ou provoquer le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et d'assise de siège, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants des coussins gonflables SRS. En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déclenchement (déploiement) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils sont alors encore très chauds. 10

For owners

NX300h_U_OM78007U

656
AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Retirez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau. Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus. Ne rien poser sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter normalement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du passager avant peuvent ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.
Modification et élimination en fin de vie des éléments du système de coussins gonflables SRS Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des coussins gonflables SRS Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de l'habitacle Installation d'un équipement de protection sur la calandre (pare-buffle, parekangourou, etc.), d'un chasse-neige, de treuils ou d'une galerie de toit Modification des suspensions du véhicule Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un émetteur/récepteur radio ou lecteur de CD Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique
NX300h_U_OM78007U

657
Index
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)................................658
Alphabetical index................................. 662
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL" for information regarding the equipment listed below. · Navigation system · Lexus parking assist monitor · Audio/visual system NX300h_U_OM78007U

658 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made
by your Lexus dealer. (P. 120) If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (P. 122) The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 532) Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (P. 202) Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person. The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (P. 142)
The rear door cannot be opened Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. (P. 126)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 659
If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P. 201) Is the shift position in P? (P. 203) Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (P. 140) Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 203) Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary way. (P. 593) Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (P. 595)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal Is the power switch in ON mode? If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the power switch in ON mode (P. 591) The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is stopped It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 204) The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 166)
The power switch is turned off automatically The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (P. 203)
NX300h_U_OM78007U

660 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 567) The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 213) Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (P. 565, 572)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 88) To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON mode or start the hybrid system.
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 572) A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P. 565, 572.
NX300h_U_OM78007U

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

661

When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (P. 575)
The vehicle becomes stuck
Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (P. 604)

NX300h_U_OM78007U

662

Alphabetical index

A A/C ............................................................ 430
Air conditioning filter....................... 530 Automatic air conditioning
system ................................................. 430 Micro dust and pollen filter...........436 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......305 Function ................................................. 305 Warning light ...................................... 566 Active Sound Control (ASC) .......... 218 Air conditioning filter ..........................530 Air conditioning system.....................430 Air conditioning filter....................... 530 Automatic air conditioning
system ................................................. 430 Micro dust and pollen filter...........436 S-FLOW mode..................................432 Airbags ........................................................ 40 Airbag operating conditions...........48 Airbag precautions for your
child ..........................................................43 Airbag warning light........................ 566 Correct driving posture ....................30 Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions........................48 Curtain shield airbag
precautions...........................................46 Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................53 General airbag precautions............43

Locations of airbags............................40 Modification and disposal of
airbags .....................................................47 Seat cushion airbag.............................40 Side airbag operating
conditions .............................................48 Side airbag precautions .................... 45 Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions .......................48 Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions .......................................... 46 SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners...................649 SRS airbags .............................................40 Alarm ........................................................... 88 Alarm ..........................................................88 Warning buzzer.................................569 Anchor brackets................................ 71, 73 Antenna Radio ........................................................ 364 Smart access system
with push-button start....................140 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)........ 305
Function..................................................305 Warning light.......................................566 Approach warning ...................245, 259 Armrest .................................................... 465 ASC (Active Sound Control)...........218 Assist grips.............................................. 465

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 663

Audio system
(with navigation system)*
Audio system.......................................... 336 Antenna ..................................................364 Audio input............................................345 AUX port...............................................345 Bluetooth® audio ............................. 390 CD player..............................................367 iPod ........................................................... 374 MP3/WMA disc ...............................367 Optimal use ..........................................354 Portable music player.......................381 Radio ......................................................... 361 Setup menu...........................................347 Steering wheel audio switches...............................................342 USB memory....................................... 377
Automatic air conditioning system Air conditioning filter....................... 530 Automatic air conditioning system ................................................. 430 Micro dust and pollen filter...........436 S-FLOW mode..................................432
Automatic headlight leveling system ......................................................221
Automatic High Beam ....................... 223 Automatic light control system.........221 AUX port................................................. 345

B Back door.................................................. 129
Wireless remote control..................129 Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 550 Wattage ...................................................617 Battery (12-volt battery) If the 12-volt battery is
discharged.........................................595 Preparing and checking before
winter.................................................... 326 Warning light.......................................565 Battery (traction battery) .......................81 Bluetooth® ...............................................413 Audio system.......................................390 Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ....................... 392 Bottle holders ........................................ 448 Brake
Brake Hold .............................................216 Fluid ............................................................614 Parking brake ........................................213 Regenerative braking..........................79 Warning light.......................................565 Brake assist............................................. 305 Brake Hold................................................ 216 Break-in tips ............................................. 176 Brightness control Instrument panel light
control..................................................... 99 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .................316
Blind Spot Monitor function).........319 Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function.................................................. 321

*: Refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

NX300h_U_OM78007U

664

Alphabetical index

C Card key .....................................................118 Care
Aluminum wheels ............................. 485 Exterior................................................... 484 Interior ....................................................488 Seat belts............................................... 489 Cargo capacity........................... 182, 608 Cargo hooks ..........................................450 Cargo net hooks...................................450 CD player ................................................ 367 Chains ....................................................... 327 Child-protectors.....................................126 Child restraint system............................ 60 Booster seats installation...................68 Convertible seats
installation.............................................. 67 Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................53 Infant seats definition...........................62 Infant seats installation ........................66 Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors ..................................................... 71 Installing CRS with seat
belts ..........................................................66 Installing CRS with top tether
strap.......................................................... 73 LATCH anchors .....................................71

Child safety................................................ 59 12-volt battery precautions ............................ 514, 599 Airbag precautions.............................. 43 Back door precautions.....................135 Child restraint system.........................60 How your child should wear the seat belt.............................. 36 Installing child restraints ....................60 Moon roof precautions .................... 172 Power window lock switch.............166 Power window precautions.......... 168 Rear door child-protectors............126 Removed key battery precautions .......................................533 Seat belt extender precautions .......................................... 39 Seat belt precautions..........................38 Seat heater precautions .................440
Cleaning ...................................... 484,488 Aluminum wheels..............................485 Exterior ...................................................484 Interior.................................................... 488 Seat belts................................................489
Clock......................................................... 456

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 665

Coat hooks.............................................. 466 Compass.................................................. 473 Condenser ..............................................509 Console box ........................................... 447 Consumption screen ...............................111 Coolant
Capacity .................................................. 613 Checking...............................................508 Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................326 Warning light ...................................... 565 Cooling system .....................................508 Hybrid system overheating .........600 Cruise control Cruise control......................................267 Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................................240 Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range....................253 Cup holders............................................448 Curtain shield airbags ........................... 40 Customizable features....................... 633

D Daytime running light system............ 221 Deck board..............................................452 Deck under tray......................................451 Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors ............435 Rear window........................................435 Windshield............................................435 Differential ................................................ 614 Dimension ...............................................608 Dinghy towing ....................................... 200 Display Drive information................................ 103 Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................................. 240 Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...................253 Energy monitor........................................ 111 LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)................... 270 Multi-information display.................102 Warning messages .......................... 572 Do-it-yourself maintenance............. 498 Doors Automatic door locking and
unlocking system.............................. 127 Back door................................................129 Door glasses..........................................166 Door lock.................................................124 Outside rear view mirrors ..............163 Rear door child-protectors............126 Side doors...............................................124

NX300h_U_OM78007U

666

Alphabetical index

Drive information .................................. 103 Drive-start control .......................175, 210 Driver's seat belt reminder
light.......................................................... 567 Driver's seat position memory..........154 Driving
Break-in tips ...........................................176 Correct posture.....................................30 Driving mode select switch ......... 303 Hybrid vehicle driving tips.............324 Procedures .............................................174 Winter drive tips.................................326 Driving position memory.....................154 Memory recall function.................... 156 Dynamic radar cruise control Function ..................................................240 Warning message.............................572 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range Function ..................................................253 Warning message.............................572

E ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System).................................... 305 Eco drive mode..................................... 303 EDR (Event data recorder).....................11 E-Four....................................................... 306 Electric motor
Location .....................................................77 Specification.......................................... 610 Electric Power Steering (EPS) Function..................................................305 Warning light.......................................566 Electronic key Battery-saving function ......................141 If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................592 Replacing the battery ......................532 Electronically Controlled Brake System (ECB)....................... 305 Emergency flashers ............................ 556 Emergency, in case of If a warning buzzer sounds ..........565 If a warning light turns on ..............565 If a warning message is
displayed ............................................ 572 If the 12-volt battery is
discharged.........................................595 If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................592 If the hybrid system will
not start .............................................. 589

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 667

If you have a flat tire ..........................575 If you lose your keys ................ 120, 122 If you think something is
wrong .................................................. 564 If your vehicle becomes
stuck ..................................................... 604 If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an emergency.........................................557 If your vehicle needs to be towed................................................... 558 If your vehicle overheats ...............600 Energy monitor ..........................................111 Engine Accessory mode................................202 Compartment..................................... 502 Engine switch........................................ 201 Hood .......................................................500 How to start the hybrid system ................................................... 201 Identification number ........................610 If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency..........557 Ignition switch (power switch).................................. 201 Overheating ........................................600 Power switch......................................... 201

Engine compartment cover............. 503 Engine coolant
Capacity...................................................613 Checking .............................................. 508 Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 326 Warning light.......................................565 Engine coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 97 Engine oil Capacity.................................................... 611 Checking ...............................................504 Warning light.......................................565 Engine oil maintenance data........... 506 Engine switch...........................................201 EPS (Electronic Power Steering) Function..................................................305 Warning light.......................................566 EV indicator ...............................................79 EV drive mode ...................................... 206 Event data recorder (EDR).....................11

NX300h_U_OM78007U

668

Alphabetical index

F Flat tire ...................................................... 575 Floor mats................................................... 28 Fluid
Brake......................................................... 614 Transmission.......................................... 614 Washer ......................................................511 Fog lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 552 Switch....................................................... 227 Front passenger occupant classification system............................ 53 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light ..................................... 567 Front seats .................................................146 Adjustment............................................. 146 Cleaning ................................................ 488 Correct driving posture ....................30 Driving position memory ................ 154 Head restraints.....................................158 Power easy access system ............ 154 Seat heaters ......................................... 440 Seat position memory....................... 154 Front side marker lights Light switch ............................................ 219 Replacing light bulbs...........545, 552 Wattage....................................................617

Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .......................545 Turn signal lever................................... 212 Wattage ...................................................617
Fuel Capacity.................................................. 610 Fuel gauge ................................................97 Gas station information................. 680 Information............................................. 618 Refueling ................................................ 236 Type........................................................... 610
Fuel filler door.........................................236 Refueling ................................................ 236 When the fuel filler door cannot be opened.........................238
Fuses.......................................................... 534
G Garage door opener...........................467 Gas station information.....................680 Gauges.........................................................97 Glove box ................................................447 Grocery bag hooks...............................451

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 669

H Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)........................... 392 Head restraints....................................... 158 Headlights .................................................219
Automatic headlight leveling .........221 Automatic High Beam ....................223 Light switch ............................................ 219 Replacing light bulbs.............541, 552 Wattage....................................................617 Head-up display..................................... 106 Heated steering wheel.........................441 Heaters Automatic air conditioning
system ................................................. 430 Heated steering wheel................... 440 Outside rear view mirrors.............435 Seat heaters ......................................... 440 High mounted stoplight Replacing .............................................. 552 Hill-start assist control........................305 Hood..........................................................500 Warning message.................. 128, 572 Hooks Cargo hooks....................................... 450 Retaining hooks (floor mat).............28 Horn............................................................ 160

Hybrid battery (traction battery) Location ......................................................81 Specification............................................ 611
Hybrid battery air vent.......................... 82 Hybrid system............................................ 77
Emergency shut off system ............. 82 Energy monitor/
consumption screen.......................... 111 EV drive mode ...................................206 High voltage components.................81 Hybrid System Indicator................. 100 Hybrid system precautions ...............81 Hybrid vehicle driving tips............ 324 If the hybrid system will not
start....................................................... 589 Overheating........................................ 600 Power switch .........................................201 Regenerative braking..........................79 Starting the hybrid system...............201 Vehicle proximity notification
system..................................................... 78 Hybrid System Indicator .................... 100 Hybrid transmission ............................ 208

NX300h_U_OM78007U

670

Alphabetical index

I I/M test ..................................................... 497 Identification
Engine ....................................................... 610 Vehicle ...................................................609 Ignition switch (Power switch) ......... 201 Illuminated entry system.................... 445 Immobilizer system................................. 86 Indicators .................................................... 92 Initialization Engine oil maintenance data.......506 Items to initialize..................................643 Tire pressure warning
system ...................................................518 Inside rear view mirror .......................... 161 Instrument panel light control ............ 99 Interior lights........................................... 443
Switch.......................................................444 Wattage....................................................617 Intuitive parking assist Function ..................................................279 Warning message.............................572
J Jack
Positioning a floor jack.....................501 Vehicle-equipped jack ...................576 Jack handle ............................................. 576 Jam protection function Moon roof .............................................. 170 Power back door opener
and closer............................................138 Power windows....................................167

K Keyless entry
Smart access system with push-button start..............................140
Wireless remote control................... 118 Keys .............................................................. 118
Battery-saving function ......................141 Electronic key......................................... 118 Engine switch ........................................201 If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................592 If you lose your keys.................120, 122 Key number plate................................. 118 Keyless entry........................................... 118 Mechanical key...................................... 118 Power switch .........................................201 Replacing the battery ......................532 Warning buzzer.....................................141 Wireless remote control key.......... 118 Knee airbags ............................................. 40
L Lane Departure Alert
with steering control (LDA) ..........270 Language (multi-information
display) .................................................. 638 LATCH anchors........................................ 71 LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) .......................270 Lever
Auxiliary catch lever........................ 500 Hood lock release lever................ 500 Shift lever ...............................................208 Turn signal lever................................... 212 Wiper lever........................................... 228

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index

671

Lexus Display Audio controller......338
Lexus Enform* Lexus Enform Remote* .....................427
Lexus parking assist monitor Display.................................................... 288 Function ..................................................287 Precautions ...........................................294
License plate lights Light switch ............................................ 219 Replacing light bulbs....................... 552
Light Automatic High Beam system....223 Fog light switch ................................... 227 Headlight switch.................................. 219 Illuminated entry system.................445 Interior lights.........................................444 Interior light list ....................................443 Luggage compartment light ......... 133 Personal lights .....................................444 Replacing light bulbs....................... 538 Turn signal lever ...................................212 Vanity lights ......................................... 455 Wattage....................................................617 Welcome light illumination control................................................... 125
Light bulbs Replacing .............................................. 538 Wattage....................................................617
Luggage cover ......................................453

M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .....................................498
General maintenance.....................494 Maintenance data............................. 608 Maintenance requirements............491 Malfunction indicator lamp.............. 565 Meter Head-up display ................................. 106 Indicators .................................................. 92 Instrument panel light
control..................................................... 99 Meters .........................................................97 Multi-information display.................102 Warning lights.....................................565 Warning messages .......................... 572 Micro dust and pollen filter.............. 436 Microphone............................................ 393 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror....................... 161 Outside rear view mirror
defoggers...........................................435 Outside rear view mirrors ..............163 Vanity mirrors .....................................455 Moon roof Jam protection function....................170 Operation................................................169 Warning message.....................171, 572 MP3 disc ..................................................367

*: Refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

672

Alphabetical index

Multi-information display Drive information ................................103 Dynamic radar cruise control ..................................................240 Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range....................253 Energy monitor........................................111 Language.............................................. 638 LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) ...................253 Warning messages...........................572
N
Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle ....................... 8
O Odometer ...................................................97 Oil
Engine oil...................................................611 Rear differential oil.............................. 614 Opener Back door...............................................130 Fuel filler door......................................236 Hood .......................................................500 Outside rear view mirrors ..................163 Adjusting and folding........................ 163 Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)............. 316 Linked mirror function
when reversing................................. 164 Mirror position memory.................. 154 Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ...........................................435

Outside temperature display..............97 Overheating........................................... 600
P Panic mode................................................ 119 Parking brake
Operation................................................ 213 Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer/message ...........215 Warning light.......................................566 Parking lights Light switch.............................................219 Replacing light bulbs .......................552 Warning light.......................................566 PCS (Pre-Collision System) Function................................................... 310 PCS switch ...............................................311 Warning light.......................................566 Warning message............................. 572 Personal lights ........................................443 Switch ...................................................... 444 Power back door opener and closer .......................................................129 Power control unit coolant Capacity...................................................613 Checking .............................................. 508 Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 326 Radiator................................................. 509

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 673

Power easy access system .................154 Power outlets ......................................... 456 Power steering (Electric Power
Steering system)................................305 Warning light ...................................... 566
Power switch........................................... 201 Power windows
Door lock linked window operation ..............................................167
Jam protection function....................167 Operation............................................... 166 Window lock switch.......................... 166 Pre-Collision System (PCS) Function ...................................................310 PCS switch............................................... 311 Warning light ...................................... 566 Warning message.............................572
R Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 240 Radar cruise control
(dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range) ..................... 253 Radiator .................................................... 509 Radio............................................................361 Rear Cross Traffic Alert ......................316 Rear seat
Folding down the rear seatbacks............................................. 148

Rear side marker lights Light switch.............................................219 Replacing light bulbs .......................552
Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 547 Turn signal lever................................... 212 Wattage ...................................................617
Rear view mirror Inside rear view mirror....................... 161 Outside rear view mirrors ..............163
Rear window defogger...................... 435 Rear window wiper ..............................234 Refueling...................................................236
Capacity.................................................. 610 Fuel types................................................ 610 Opening the fuel tank cap............ 236 When the fuel filler door
cannot be opened.........................238 Regenerative braking.............................79
Remote Touch*
Replacing Electronic key battery .....................532 Fuses ........................................................534 Light bulbs.............................................538 Tires .......................................................... 575
Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required .................492
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ...................................646
Road accident cautions........................ 84

*: Refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
NX300h_U_OM78007U

674

Alphabetical index

S
Safety Connect* ...................................477
Seat belts..................................................... 32 Adjusting the seat belt........................35 Automatic Locking Retractor ................................................ 36 Child restraint system installation..............................................60 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt .............................................. 489 Emergency Locking Retractor ................................................ 36 How to wear your seat belt .............30 How your child should wear the seat belt ..............................36 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use.................................................... 37 Reminder light and buzzer ...........567 Seat belt extender.................................36 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners ................. 647 Seat belt pretensioners ......................35 SRS warning light.............................. 566
Seat heaters ............................................440 Seat position memory...........................154 Seat ventilators...................................... 442 Seating capacity..................................... 186

Seats Adjustment..............................................146 Adjustment precautions...................146 Child seats/child restraint system installation .............................60 Cleaning................................................ 488 Driving position memory.................154 Folding down the rear seatbacks ............................................. 147 Head restraint....................................... 158 Power easy access system.............154 Properly sitting in the seat................30 Seat heaters..........................................440 Seat position memory.......................154 Seat ventilators.................................... 442
Sensor Automatic High Beam system ... 223 Inside rear view mirror......................162 Intuitive parking assist...................... 279 Radar sensor................... 248, 262, 311 Rain-sensing windshield wipers................................................... 232
Service reminder indicators ................92 S-FLOW mode......................................432 Shift lever................................................. 208 Side airbags............................................... 40 Side doors ................................................. 124 Side marker lights
Light switch.............................................219 Replacing light bulbs .......... 545, 552

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 675

Side mirrors ..............................................163 Adjusting and folding........................ 163 Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)............. 316 Heaters....................................................435
Side turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 552 Turn signal lever ...................................212
Smart access system with push-button start ...................... 140 Antenna location................................. 140 Entry functions............................ 124, 129 Starting the hybrid system.............. 201 Warning message.............................572
Snow tires ................................................ 326 Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................. 616 Storage location .................................576 Spark plug .................................................613 Specifications .........................................608 Speedometer .............................................97 Sport mode .............................................303 Steering wheel Adjustment ............................................. 160 Audio switches....................................342 Heated steering wheel................... 440 Power easy access system ............ 154 Telephone switches..........................402 Stop lights Replacing light bulbs....................... 552 Storage feature ..................................... 446 Storage precautions............................ 446 Stuck If the vehicle becomes stuck ....... 604

Sunglass holder......................................449 Sun visors................................................. 455 Switch
ASC (Active Sound Control) dial ...........................................................218
Audio remote control switches .............................................. 342
Automatic High Beam switch..... 223 Brake hold switch................................216 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
main switch..........................................316 Cruise control
switch ...........................240, 253, 267 Door lock switch..................................126 Driving mode select switch..........303 Driving position memory
switches ................................................154 Emergency flashers switch...........556 EV drive mode switch ....................206 Fog light switch....................................227 Garage door opener
switches .............................................. 467 Heated steering wheel ...................440 HUD (Head-up display)
switches ............................................... 106 Ignition switch........................................201 Intuitive parking assist switch....... 279 LDA switch........................................... 270 Light switches........................................219 Meter control switches.................... 103 Moon roof switches ...........................169 Outside rear view mirror
switches ................................................163

*: Refer to the "NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

NX300h_U_OM78007U

676

Alphabetical index

Parking brake switch..........................213 PCS switch............................................... 311 Power back door opener
and closer switch.................... 130, 131 Power switch......................................... 201 Power window switch ...................... 166 Rear window and
outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ............................435 Rear window wiper and washer switch...................................234 Seat heater switches........................ 440 "SOS" button........................................ 477 Talk switch .................................402, 423 Telephone switches..........................402 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button................... 240, 253 VSC OFF switch ...............................307 Window lock switch.......................... 166 Windshield wipers and washer switch...................................228

T Tachometer ................................................97 Tail lights
Light switch.............................................219 Replacing light bulbs .......................552 Talk switch....................................402, 423 Telephone switch ................................. 402 Theft deterrent system Alarm ..........................................................88 Immobilizer system..............................86 Tire inflation pressure Maintenance data................................615 Warning light.......................................567 Tire information ...................................... 621 Glossary................................................. 627 Size ........................................................... 624 Tire identification number ............. 623 Uniform Tire Quality Grading....625 Tire pressure warning system Function....................................................517 Initializing .................................................517 Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters..................517 Registering ID codes.........................519 Warning light.......................................567

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Alphabetical index 677

Tires..............................................................516 Chains...................................................... 327 Checking................................................. 516 Glossary ................................................. 627 If you have a flat tire ..........................575 Inflation pressure.....................525, 615 Replacing ...............................................575 Rotating tires ......................................... 516 Size............................................................. 615 Snow tires ..............................................326 Spare tire.....................................575, 616 Tire identification number..............623 Tire pressure warning system ...... 517 Uniform Tire Quality Grading....625 Warning light .......................................567
Tools........................................................... 576 Top tether strap........................................ 73 Total load capacity...............................608 Towing
Dinghy towing .................................... 200 Emergency towing...........................558 Towing eyelet........................................ 561 Trailer towing ..............................187, 199 TRAC (Traction Control) .................305 Trailer towing .................................187, 199

Transmission Hybrid transmission .........................208 Selecting a driving mode...............303
Trip meters..................................................97 Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............................ 545, 547, 552
Turn signal lever................................... 212 Wattage ...................................................617
U USB memory ..........................................377 USB port.................................................. 345
V Vanity lights
Vanity lights..........................................455 Wattage ...................................................617 Vanity mirrors........................................ 455 Vanity lights..........................................455 Vehicle data recordings.........................10 Vehicle identification number ........ 609 Vehicle Stability Control (VSC).... 305 Voice command system.....................423 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).... 305

NX300h_U_OM78007U

678

Alphabetical index

W Warning buzzers
Approach warning............... 245, 259 Downshifting ......................................... 210 Intuitive parking assist......................282 Light reminder.......................................221 Open door............................................. 128 Seat belt reminder.............................567 Warning lights ABS.......................................................... 566 Brake hold operated
indicator ............................................. 566 Brake Override System .................567 Brake system....................................... 565 Charging system............................... 565 Drive-Start Control...........................567 Electric power steering.................. 566 High coolant temperature............ 565 Low engine oil pressure................ 565 Low fuel level .......................................567 Malfunction indicator lamp.......... 565 Master warning light.........................567 Parking brake indicator ................. 566 PCS warning light ............................ 566 Seat belt reminder light...................567 Slip indicator........................................ 566 SRS........................................................... 566 Tire pressure ........................................567

Warning messages...............................572 Washer
Checking .................................................. 511 Low washer fluid
warning message.................. 511, 572 Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 326 Switch ...................................................... 228 Washing and waxing .......................... 484 Weights Cargo capacity........................182, 608 Load limits ................................. 186, 608 Weights................................................. 608 Wheels ..................................................... 528 Replacing wheels ..............................528 Size .............................................................615 Window glasses...................................... 166 Window lock switch.............................. 166 Windows Power windows....................................166 Rear window defogger ..................435 Washer................................................... 228 Windshield wiper de-icer................. 436 Windshield wipers Intermittent windshield wipers.... 228 Rain-sensing windshield
wipers...................................................230 Winter driving tips ................................326 Wireless charger.................................. 458

NX300h_U_OM78007U

Wireless communication ...... 382, 390 Wireless remote control key..............118
Battery-saving function...................... 141 Locking/Unlocking..............................118 Panic mode..............................................119 Replacing the battery.......................532 WMA disc ............................................... 367
X XM® Satellite Radio.............................361

Alphabetical index 679

NX300h_U_OM78007U

680

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever P. 500

Fuel filler door P. 237

Hood lock release lever P. 500

Tire inflation pressure P. 615

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill -- reference)
Engine oil type

14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.) Unleaded gasoline only

P. 610 P. 615

With filter Without filter

4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.) 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

P. 612

NX300h_U_OM78007U